Category: Residential Housing Market

  • MIL-OSI USA: De La Cruz Leads Efforts to Raise Awareness of VA Home Loan Program

    Source: United States House of Representatives – Monica De La Cruz (TX-15)

    Rep. Monica De La Cruz (R-TX) introduced the bipartisan VA Home Loan Awareness Act to ensure Veterans and their families are aware of their VA benefit eligibility when applying for a home loan.

    The legislation will incorporate an impactful disclosure on the Uniform Residential Loan Application (URLA) to direct applicants to consult their lender for more information about the VA Home Loan Program, which has benefits that can include zero down payments, no mortgage insurance, and often lower interest rates compared to conventional FHA loans.

    The legislation was introduced alongside Rep. Al Green (D-TX). Original co-sponsors of the legislation include: Rep. August Pfluger (R-TX), Rep. Mike Lawler (R-NY), Rep. Lance Gooden (R-TX), Rep. Brian Fitzpatrick (R-PA), Rep. Dan Crenshaw (R-TX), Rep. Brittany Pettersen (D-CO), Rep. Joyce Beatty (D-OH), Rep. Josh Gottheimer (D-NJ), Rep. Josh Harder (D-CA), Rep. Deborah Ross (D-NC).

    “We are forever grateful to our Veterans and their families for their sacrifices to our nation. Though we can never fully repay them, we can ensure they can access the benefits they deserve. Only a fraction of veterans are utilizing the significant advantages offered by the VA Home Loan Program. My bipartisan legislation ensures that our nation’s heroes can access the benefits they earned, achieve homeownership, and live the American dream they fought to protect.” – Congresswoman Monica De La Cruz

    The legislation has garnered robust support from the Veterans Association of Real Estate Professionals (VAREP) and the Defense Credit Union Council (DCUC).
     
    “Too many veterans are unaware of the VA home loan benefit they’ve earned. This legislation adds visibility at the loan application stage. While using the benefit is their choice, awareness empowers them to ask the right questions and make informed decisions—ultimately increasing usage among those who qualify.” – Son Nguyen, President of the Veterans Association of Real Estate Professionals (VAREP)

    “We thank Congresswoman Monica De La Cruz for her leadership in reintroducing the ‘VA Home Loan Awareness Act’ to address the housing challenges faced by military families. The affordable housing crisis continues to place financial strain on service members and veterans, and policy solutions like this are essential to ensuring they have access to stable and affordable housing. Defense credit unions remain committed to supporting military families through innovative mortgage products and financial counseling, but legislative action is critical to expanding the overall impact we can offer to these communities. We look forward to assisting congressional leadership in their efforts to strengthen VA home loan programs and improve housing affordability for those who serve our nation.” – Anthony Hernandez, DCUC President & CEO

    Background:
     
    The bipartisan VA Home Loan Awareness Act incorporates a key disclosure below the military service question on the Uniform Residential Loan Application (URLA), the standard mortgage prequalification application. The disclosure emphasizes that Veterans and their surviving spouses may qualify for a VA Home Loan and directs applicants to consult their lender for more information. 

    The VA Home Loan Program is a vital tool for military families to achieve homeownership. Despite the benefits offered by this program, only 13% of Veterans report utilizing their VA Home Loan benefit, citing a lack of awareness as the primary reason for not using it. The VA Home Loan Awareness Act will address this challenge.

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Homes England, Greater Manchester and West Yorkshire Pension Funds provide £96.7 million for Leeds residential scheme

    Source: United Kingdom – Government Statements

    Press release

    Homes England, Greater Manchester and West Yorkshire Pension Funds provide £96.7 million for Leeds residential scheme

    Funding for Barings, a large diversified real estate manager, to develop a major residential scheme near Leeds city centre

    Homes England, Greater Manchester Pension Fund (GMPF) and West Yorkshire Pension Fund (WYPF) will provide a £91 million loan over a four-year term. In addition to this, the West Yorkshire Combined Authority has provided a £5.7 million grant from its brownfield housing fund.

    The scheme is being developed as a joint venture with Glenbrook, a leading UK residential developer, which will retain a stake in the project and act as development manager.

    Located on Kirkstall Road, the scheme will deliver 618 one, two and three-bedroom apartments set across five buildings sitting in extensive landscape grounds, including a new public realm, next to the River Aire.

    The five-acre site will include over 10,000 square feet of amenity space, including a residents’ lounge, co-working area and gym, two private roof terraces and 3,800 square feet of commercial space. Construction has begun and is expected to be completed by the end of 2027.

    Located just one mile from Leeds city centre and within walking distance of Wellington Place – a key commercial hub – the site offers excellent connectivity. Leeds Central railway station is approximately one mile away, while both the University of Leeds and Leeds Beckett University are easily accessible.

    Nigel Barclay, Director of Loans at Homes England, said:

    As the Government’s housing and regeneration agency, we are committed to working in partnership with organisations in both the public and private sector, to achieve their ambitions and develop much needed new homes across the country.

    The Kirkstall Road Scheme is an excellent example of how the Agency’s Home Building Fund is delivering in priority regeneration locations whilst supporting small and medium house builders, that are crucial to building a diverse and resilient housing sector.

    Darren Hutchinson, Head of UK Real Estate Transactions at Barings, said:

    The Kirkstall Road scheme represents exactly the kind of high-quality, well-located residential investment we seek on behalf of our partners.

    With the support of Homes England, GMPF, and WYCA, and through our joint venture with Glenbrook, we are delivering a best-in-class residential scheme that will provide much-needed new homes while creating long-term value for our investors.

    Darran Ward, Head of Alternatives at West Yorkshire Pension Fund, said:

    We are proud to support this significant investment in Leeds, helping to deliver high-quality, energy-efficient homes that are much needed in our region.

    By working alongside our Northern LGPS partner Greater Manchester Pension Fund, and Homes England, we are demonstrating how collaboration between institutional investors and government can drive local economic growth, create jobs, and provide long-term, sustainable housing solutions.

    This project reflects our commitment to investing in our home market whilst ensuring returns for our members.

    ENDS

    About Homes England 

    We are the government’s housing and regeneration Agency, and we’re here to drive the creation of more affordable, quality homes and thriving places so that everyone has a place to live and grow.  

    We make this happen by working in partnership with thousands of organisations of all sizes, using our powers, expertise, land, capital and influence to bring investment to communities and get more quality homes built. 

    Learn more about us: https://www.gov.uk/government/organisations/homes-england/about 

    Press Office Contact Details 

    Email: media@homesengland.gov.uk 

    Phone: 0207 874 8262

    For Barings

    Ben Monteith/Tom Carnegie (SEC Newgate)

    baringsRE@secnewgate.co.uk

    Barings Real Estate

    Barings Real Estate (BRE) is a part of Barings and offers a broad range of global investment opportunities across the private debt and equity investment markets. BRE invests in all major property sectors and offers an expansive range of financing solutions to real estate borrowers.  Follow us on LinkedIn at www.linkedin.com/showcase/barings-alternative-investments.

    About Barings

    Barings is a $421+ billion* global asset management firm that partners with institutional, insurance, and intermediary clients, and supports leading businesses with flexible financing solutions. The firm, a subsidiary of MassMutual, seeks to deliver excess returns by leveraging its global scale and capabilities across public and private markets in fixed income, real assets and capital solutions.

     *As of December 31, 2024

    About CBRE Group, Inc.

    CBRE Group, Inc. (NYSE:CBRE), a Fortune 500 and S&P 500 company headquartered in Dallas, is the world’s largest commercial real estate services and investment firm (based on 2024 revenue). The company has more than 140,000 employees (including Turner & Townsend employees) serving clients in more than 100 countries. CBRE serves a diverse range of clients with an integrated suite of services, including facilities, transaction and project management; property management; investment management; appraisal and valuation; property leasing; strategic consulting; property sales; mortgage services and development services. Please visit our website at www.cbre.com.

    About West Yorkshire Brownfield Housing Fund

    For more information about the Brownfield Housing Fund, visit: West Yorkshire Mayor’s £89 million investment to unlock 5,400 new homes.

    Updates to this page

    Published 28 March 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-Evening Report: 25 years into a new century and housing is less affordable than ever

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Brendan Coates, Program Director, Housing and Economic Security, Grattan Institute

    Of all the problems facing Australia today, few have worsened so rapidly in the past 25 years as housing affordability.

    Housing has become more and more expensive – to rent or buy – and home ownership continues to fall among poorer Australians of all ages.

    Housing makes up most of Australia’s wealth, so more expensive homes concentrated in fewer hands means growing wealth inequality, with a marked generational divide.

    To unwind inequality, we need to make housing cheaper, and that means building much more of it.

    Housing has become more expensive

    The price of the typical Australian home has grown much faster than incomes since the turn of the century: from about four times median incomes in the early 2000s, to more than eight times today, and nearly 10 times in Sydney.

    Housing has also become more expensive to rent, especially since the pandemic.

    Rental vacancy rates are at record lows and asking rents (that is for newly advertised properties) have risen fast – by roughly 20% in Sydney and Melbourne in the past four years, and by much more in Brisbane, Adelaide, and Perth.

    Home ownership is falling fast among the young

    Rising house prices are pushing home ownership out of reach for many younger Australians.

    In the early 1990s it took about six years to save a 20% deposit for a typical dwelling for an average household. It now takes more than 12 years.

    Unsurprisingly, home ownership rates are falling fastest for younger people. Whereas 57% of 30–34 year-olds owned their home in 2001, just 50% did so by 2021. And just 36% of 25–29 year olds own their home today, down from 43% in 2001.

    And home ownership is falling fastest among the poorest 40% of each age group.

    Fewer homeowners means more inequality

    People on low incomes, who are increasingly renters, are spending more of their incomes on housing.

    The real incomes of the lowest fifth of households increased by about 26% between 2003–04 and 2019–20. But more than half of this was chewed up by skyrocketing housing costs, with real incomes after housing costs increasing by only 12%.

    In contrast, the real incomes for the highest fifth of households increased by 47%, and their after-housing real incomes by almost as much: 43%.

    Wealth inequality in Australia is still around the OECD average but has been climbing for two decades, largely due to rising house prices.

    In 2019–20, one-quarter of homeowning households reported net wealth exceeding $1 million. By contrast, median net wealth for non-homeowning households was $60,000.

    Since 2003–04, the wealth of high-income households has grown by more than 50%, much of that due to increasing property values. By contrast, the wealth of low-income households – mostly non-homeowners – has grown by less than 10%.

    The growing divide between the housing “haves” and “have nots” is largely generational. Older Australians who bought their homes before prices really took off in the early 2000s have seen their share of the country’s wealth steadily climb.

    This inequality will get baked in as wealth is passed onto the next generation.

    Some Australians will be lucky enough to inherit one or more homes. Others – typically those on lower incomes – will receive none.

    To unwind inequality, we need to make housing less expensive

    We haven’t built enough

    Australians’ demand for housing since the turn of the decade is a story of historically low interest rates, increased access to finance, tax and welfare settings that favour investments in housing, and a booming population.

    But one widely-blamed villain – the introduction of the 50% capital gains tax discount in 1999, together with negative gearing – is likely to have played only a small part in rising house prices.

    That’s because the value of these tax advantages – about $10.9 billion a year – is tiny compared to Australia’s $11 trillion housing market.

    Instead, the biggest problem is that housing construction in recent years hasn’t kept up with increasing demand.

    Strong migration over the past two decades has seen Australia’s population rise much faster than most other wealthy countries in recent decades, boosting the number of homes we need. Rising incomes, and demographic trends such as rising rates of divorce and an ageing Australia, have further increased housing demand.

    Yet Australia has one of the lowest levels of housing per person of any OECD country, and is one of only four OECD countries where the amount of housing per person went backwards over the past two decades.

    This is largely a failure of housing policy. Australia’s land-use planning rules – the rules that dictate what can get built where – are highly restrictive and complex. Current rules and community opposition make it very difficult to build new homes, particularly in the places where people most want to live and work.

    More homes would mean less inequality

    Fixing this will allow mores home to get built, moderate house price growth, and reduce barriers to home ownership. In turn, this will reduce the inequalities created by our broken housing system.

    Easing planning restrictions is hard for governments, because many residents don’t want more homes near theirs.

    The good news is that the penny has started to drop and state governments – particularly in Victoria and New South Wales – are making meaningful progress towards allowing more homes in activity centres and on existing transport links.

    But now the real test begins: how will governments respond to the backlash from people who would prefer their communities to stay the same?

    How well governments hold the line against the so-called NIMBYs (Not In My Back Yard) will tell us a lot about what we can expect to happen to inequality in Australia in the future.

    Grattan Institute began with contributions to its endowment of $15 million from each of the federal and Victorian governments, $4 million from BHP Billiton, and $1 million from NAB. In order to safeguard its independence, Grattan Institute’s board controls this endowment. The funds are invested and contribute to funding Grattan Institute’s activities. Grattan Institute also receives funding from corporates, foundations, and individuals to support its general activities, as disclosed on its website.

    Joey Moloney and Matthew Bowes do not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organisation that would benefit from this article, and have disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

    ref. 25 years into a new century and housing is less affordable than ever – https://theconversation.com/25-years-into-a-new-century-and-housing-is-less-affordable-than-ever-250067

    MIL OSI AnalysisEveningReport.nz

  • MIL-OSI USA: Justice Department Launches Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force

    Source: US State of California

    Task Force Invites Public Input Targeting Red Tape that Hinders Free Market Competition

    Today, the Justice Department launches an Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force to advocate for the elimination of anticompetitive state and federal laws and regulations that undermine free market competition and harm consumers, workers, and businesses. The Antitrust Division has a long history of advocacy against laws and regulations that create unnecessary barriers to competition.  The Task Force will surge resources to these efforts and invite public comments to support the Administration’s mission to unwind laws and regulations that hinder business dynamism and make markets less competitive.    

    “Realizing President Trump’s economic Golden Age will require unwinding burdensome regulations that stifle free market competition. This Antitrust Division will stand against harmful barriers to competition whether imposed by public regulators or private monopolists,” said Assistant Attorney General Abigail Slater of the Justice Department’s Antitrust Division. “We look forward to working with the public and with other federal agencies to identify and eliminate anticompetitive laws and regulations.”

    On Jan. 31, President Trump signed Executive Order 14192 declaring “the policy of the executive branch” to be that federal agencies should “alleviate unnecessary regulatory burdens placed on the American people.” Consistent with this policy, on Feb. 19, President Trump signed Executive Order 14219 directing agencies to “initiate a process to review all regulations” and identify regulations that, among other things, “impose undue burdens on small businesses and impede private enterprise and entrepreneurship.” Consistent with longstanding practice, the Antitrust Division will support federal agencies’ deregulatory initiatives by sharing its market expertise on regulations that pose the greatest barriers to economic growth.

    Regulatory capture is a well-studied phenomenon in which agencies become “captured” by special interests and big businesses, rather than serving the interests of the American people. But when regulations serve the few and impose undue burdens on small businesses, private enterprise, and entrepreneurs, they also harm competition and ultimately hurt American consumers, workers, and businesses. For example, regulations can increase compliance costs, preventing businesses from competing on a level playing field with powerful corporations. Regulations can also discourage or even intentionally prohibit small businesses and new products from entering markets and lowering prices for American families. In contrast, eliminating unnecessary anticompetitive regulations makes it easier for businesses to compete. More competition empowers the American people — not government regulators — to drive economic progress and innovation. When every American has a fair opportunity to enjoy the benefits of competitive free markets, every American has an opportunity to realize the American dream.

    By identifying and working with state and federal agencies to revise or eliminate these laws and regulations, the Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force will contribute to making the American dream a reality. As a first step, the Antitrust Division will initiate a public inquiry to identify unnecessary laws and regulations that raise the highest barriers to competition. In particular, the Division will seek information from the public about laws and regulations that make it more difficult for businesses to compete effectively, especially in markets that have the greatest impact on American households, including:

    • Housing: Americans spend more than one-third of their monthly income on housing, and the cost of owning or renting a home continues to rise. Laws and regulations in housing markets can contribute to these problems by making it more difficult for companies to build and ordinary Americans to rent or buy.
    • Transportation: Laws and regulations in areas like airlines, rail, and ocean shipping can grant antitrust immunities, outright monopolies, or safe harbors for conduct that undermines competition. As a result, Americans pay more for travel, fuel, and a variety of other products.
    • Food and Agriculture: By the end of the Biden-Harris Administration, grocery prices were 27% higher than at the end of the first Trump Administration. Eliminating unnecessary anticompetitive regulations will help farmers, growers, and ranchers increase the amount of food they produce and unlock lower prices for American consumers.
    • Healthcare: Laws and regulations in healthcare markets too often discourage doctors and hospitals from providing low-cost, high-quality healthcare and instead encourage overbilling and consolidation. These kinds of unnecessary anticompetitive regulations put affordable healthcare out of reach for millions of American families.
    • Energy: Reliable and affordable energy is essential to modern American life — whether in homes, businesses, manufacturing plants, schools, hospitals, sporting events, or data centers. Laws and regulations can undermine reliability and affordability by protecting incumbent electricity providers from competition or disruptive innovation.

    The public will have 60 days to submit comments at Regulations.gov, no later than May 26. Once submitted, comments will be posted to Regulations.gov. All market participants are invited to provide comments in response to this inquiry, including consumers, consumer advocates, small businesses, employers, trade groups, industry analysts, and other entities that are impacted by anticompetitive state or federal laws and regulations.

    In addition to reviewing responses from the public, the Task Force will bring together attorneys, economists, and other staff from across the Division, together with interagency partners, to identify state and federal laws and regulations that unnecessarily harm competition. The Antitrust Division will then take appropriate action, including helping agencies revise or eliminate these regulations.

    The Task Force will also consider other ways to advocate for the removal of anticompetitive laws and regulations. The Division routinely files amicus briefs and statements of interests in private litigation, and it will continue to do so to promote competition and oppose anticompetitive laws and regulations. The Division also provides comments on proposed legislation in the states on the request of state legislators. These efforts will continue with an eye toward protecting competition and interstate commerce in light of dormant Commerce Clause principles.

    The Justice Department has a long history of serving as the Executive Branch’s chief competition advocate by working with agencies to identify and eliminate unnecessary regulations. In 2018, the Justice Department released a report on how regulations can harm competition. Following this report, the Justice Department submitted dozens of comments to federal agencies supporting efforts to eliminate unnecessary regulations and increase competition. For example, the Justice Department, in consultation with the Federal Trade Commission, submitted a comment opposing  regulations that would have protected incumbent electricity transmission companies from much-needed competition in energy markets across the country. The Justice Department filed comments aimed at making it easier for individuals and small businesses to navigate the federal government bureaucracy. The Justice Department also provided technical assistance and trainings to federal agencies to help them analyze how new and existing regulations might affect competition, or whether competition may be a better alternative to regulation altogether.

    The Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force will continue these efforts, supporting ongoing efforts across the Trump Administration to unleash competition by eliminating unnecessary, burdensome, and wasteful government regulations. For more information on the Task Force, including contact information, see the Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force page on the Division’s website.

    FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: AnticompetitiveRegulations@usdoj.gov.

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI Security: Justice Department Launches Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force

    Source: United States Attorneys General 1

    Task Force Invites Public Input Targeting Red Tape that Hinders Free Market Competition

    Today, the Justice Department launches an Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force to advocate for the elimination of anticompetitive state and federal laws and regulations that undermine free market competition and harm consumers, workers, and businesses. The Antitrust Division has a long history of advocacy against laws and regulations that create unnecessary barriers to competition.  The Task Force will surge resources to these efforts and invite public comments to support the Administration’s mission to unwind laws and regulations that hinder business dynamism and make markets less competitive.    

    “Realizing President Trump’s economic Golden Age will require unwinding burdensome regulations that stifle free market competition. This Antitrust Division will stand against harmful barriers to competition whether imposed by public regulators or private monopolists,” said Assistant Attorney General Abigail Slater of the Justice Department’s Antitrust Division. “We look forward to working with the public and with other federal agencies to identify and eliminate anticompetitive laws and regulations.”

    On Jan. 31, President Trump signed Executive Order 14192 declaring “the policy of the executive branch” to be that federal agencies should “alleviate unnecessary regulatory burdens placed on the American people.” Consistent with this policy, on Feb. 19, President Trump signed Executive Order 14219 directing agencies to “initiate a process to review all regulations” and identify regulations that, among other things, “impose undue burdens on small businesses and impede private enterprise and entrepreneurship.” Consistent with longstanding practice, the Antitrust Division will support federal agencies’ deregulatory initiatives by sharing its market expertise on regulations that pose the greatest barriers to economic growth.

    Regulatory capture is a well-studied phenomenon in which agencies become “captured” by special interests and big businesses, rather than serving the interests of the American people. But when regulations serve the few and impose undue burdens on small businesses, private enterprise, and entrepreneurs, they also harm competition and ultimately hurt American consumers, workers, and businesses. For example, regulations can increase compliance costs, preventing businesses from competing on a level playing field with powerful corporations. Regulations can also discourage or even intentionally prohibit small businesses and new products from entering markets and lowering prices for American families. In contrast, eliminating unnecessary anticompetitive regulations makes it easier for businesses to compete. More competition empowers the American people — not government regulators — to drive economic progress and innovation. When every American has a fair opportunity to enjoy the benefits of competitive free markets, every American has an opportunity to realize the American dream.

    By identifying and working with state and federal agencies to revise or eliminate these laws and regulations, the Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force will contribute to making the American dream a reality. As a first step, the Antitrust Division will initiate a public inquiry to identify unnecessary laws and regulations that raise the highest barriers to competition. In particular, the Division will seek information from the public about laws and regulations that make it more difficult for businesses to compete effectively, especially in markets that have the greatest impact on American households, including:

    • Housing: Americans spend more than one-third of their monthly income on housing, and the cost of owning or renting a home continues to rise. Laws and regulations in housing markets can contribute to these problems by making it more difficult for companies to build and ordinary Americans to rent or buy.
    • Transportation: Laws and regulations in areas like airlines, rail, and ocean shipping can grant antitrust immunities, outright monopolies, or safe harbors for conduct that undermines competition. As a result, Americans pay more for travel, fuel, and a variety of other products.
    • Food and Agriculture: By the end of the Biden-Harris Administration, grocery prices were 27% higher than at the end of the first Trump Administration. Eliminating unnecessary anticompetitive regulations will help farmers, growers, and ranchers increase the amount of food they produce and unlock lower prices for American consumers.
    • Healthcare: Laws and regulations in healthcare markets too often discourage doctors and hospitals from providing low-cost, high-quality healthcare and instead encourage overbilling and consolidation. These kinds of unnecessary anticompetitive regulations put affordable healthcare out of reach for millions of American families.
    • Energy: Reliable and affordable energy is essential to modern American life — whether in homes, businesses, manufacturing plants, schools, hospitals, sporting events, or data centers. Laws and regulations can undermine reliability and affordability by protecting incumbent electricity providers from competition or disruptive innovation.

    The public will have 60 days to submit comments at Regulations.gov, no later than May 26. Once submitted, comments will be posted to Regulations.gov. All market participants are invited to provide comments in response to this inquiry, including consumers, consumer advocates, small businesses, employers, trade groups, industry analysts, and other entities that are impacted by anticompetitive state or federal laws and regulations.

    In addition to reviewing responses from the public, the Task Force will bring together attorneys, economists, and other staff from across the Division, together with interagency partners, to identify state and federal laws and regulations that unnecessarily harm competition. The Antitrust Division will then take appropriate action, including helping agencies revise or eliminate these regulations.

    The Task Force will also consider other ways to advocate for the removal of anticompetitive laws and regulations. The Division routinely files amicus briefs and statements of interests in private litigation, and it will continue to do so to promote competition and oppose anticompetitive laws and regulations. The Division also provides comments on proposed legislation in the states on the request of state legislators. These efforts will continue with an eye toward protecting competition and interstate commerce in light of dormant Commerce Clause principles.

    The Justice Department has a long history of serving as the Executive Branch’s chief competition advocate by working with agencies to identify and eliminate unnecessary regulations. In 2018, the Justice Department released a report on how regulations can harm competition. Following this report, the Justice Department submitted dozens of comments to federal agencies supporting efforts to eliminate unnecessary regulations and increase competition. For example, the Justice Department, in consultation with the Federal Trade Commission, submitted a comment opposing  regulations that would have protected incumbent electricity transmission companies from much-needed competition in energy markets across the country. The Justice Department filed comments aimed at making it easier for individuals and small businesses to navigate the federal government bureaucracy. The Justice Department also provided technical assistance and trainings to federal agencies to help them analyze how new and existing regulations might affect competition, or whether competition may be a better alternative to regulation altogether.

    The Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force will continue these efforts, supporting ongoing efforts across the Trump Administration to unleash competition by eliminating unnecessary, burdensome, and wasteful government regulations. For more information on the Task Force, including contact information, see the Anticompetitive Regulations Task Force page on the Division’s website.

    FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: AnticompetitiveRegulations@usdoj.gov.

    MIL Security OSI

  • MIL-OSI: Sachem Capital Reports Full Year 2024 Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    BRANFORD, Conn., March 27, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Sachem Capital Corp. (NYSE American: SACH), a real estate lender specializing in originating, underwriting, funding, servicing, and managing a portfolio of loans secured by first mortgages on real property, today announced its financial results for the year ended December 31, 2024.

    John Villano, CPA, Sachem Capital’s Chief Executive Officer commented, “We remain focused on effectively managing our loan portfolio and protecting our capital as we continue our efforts to navigate challenging financial and real estate markets. These efforts include managing our debt load and the associated carrying costs and selling non-performing loans, which should reduce the allowances for credit losses that have been a drag on earnings. We continue to evaluate attractive opportunities to invest capital while maintaining a disciplined capital allocation approach. With our experienced team, we remain confident that growth will return as we leverage strong industry relationships and work to increase shareholder value.”

    Results of operations for year ended December 31, 2024

    Total revenue was $57.5 million compared to $64.7 million in 2023. The decline in revenue was primarily due to fewer originations and a reduction in the number of loans held for investment. Also, interest income, fee income from loans and other investment income was lower compared to 2023. Interest income in 2024 was $43.2 million compared to $49.3 million for 2023. On the other hand, income from partnership investments increased approximately 48.8%, year-over-year.

    Total operating costs and expenses for 2024 were $75.3 million compared to $49.7 million in 2023. The change was primarily due to an increase of $21.3 million in provision for credit losses and a $1.9 million increase in general and administrative expenses. These increases were offset by lower interest and amortization expense of $1.4 million.

    Net loss attributable to common shareholders for 2024 was $43.9 million, or $0.93 per share compared to net income attributable to common shareholders of $12.1 million, or $0.27 per share for 2023.

    Balance Sheet

    Total assets as of the year ended December 31, 2024 were $492.0 million compared to $620.9 million as of December 31, 2023. The change was primarily due to net reduction in loans held for investment by $130.5 million. Total liabilities as of December 31, 2024 were $310.3 million compared to $390.8 million as of December 31, 2023, with the primary decreases coming from the repayment of unsubordinated unsecured five year notes that matured in 2024, in the aggregate principal amount of $58.3 million, and the paydown of lines of credit balances in the aggregate amount of $21.8 million.

    Total indebtedness at year-end was $301.2 million. This includes: $226.5 million of notes payable (net of $3.7 million of deferred financing costs) and $74.7 million aggregate outstanding principal amount of the amounts due under various credit facilities and the mortgage loan on the Company’s office building.

    Total shareholders’ equity at year-end 2024 was $181.7 million compared to $230.1 million at year-end 2023. The change was primarily due to an operational total net loss for the year of $39.6 million and preferred and common stock dividends declared and paid of $15.7 million.

    Dividends

    Over the course of 2024, the Company paid an aggregate of $4.3 million in dividends to holders of its Series A Cumulative Redeemable Preferred Stock and $11.4 million to the holders of its common shares.

    On February 24, 2025, the Company declared a dividend of $0.484375 per share on the Series A Preferred Stock, payable on March 31, 2025 to Series A Preferred Stock shareholders of record on March 15, 2025.

    On March 6, 2025, the Company declared a quarterly dividend of $0.05 per common share payable to common shareholders of record on March 17, 2025. The dividend is expected to be paid March 31, 2025.

    The Company currently operates and qualifies as a Real Estate Investment Trust (REIT) for federal income taxes and intends to continue to qualify and operate as a REIT. Under federal income tax rules, a REIT is required to distribute a minimum of 90% of taxable income each year to its shareholders, and the Company intends to comply with this requirement for the current year.

    Investor Conference Webcast and Call

    The Company is hosting a webcast and conference call Thursday, March 27, 2025 at 8:00 a.m. Eastern Time, to discuss in greater detail its financial results for the full year ended December 31, 2024. A webcast of the call may be accessed on the Company’s website at https://sachemcapitalcorp.com/investor-relations/events-and-presentations/default.aspx.

    Interested parties can access the conference call via telephone by dialing toll free 877-704-4453 for U.S. callers or +1-201-389-0920 for international callers.

    Replay

    The webcast will also be archived on the Company’s website and a telephone replay of the call will be available through Thursday, April 10, 2025, and can be accessed by dialing 1-844-512-2921 for U.S. callers or +1 412-317-6671 for international callers and by entering replay passcode: 13750432.

    About Sachem Capital Corp

    Sachem Capital Corp. is a mortgage REIT that specializes in originating, underwriting, funding, servicing, and managing a portfolio of loans secured by first mortgages on real property. It offers short-term (i.e., three years or less) secured, nonbanking loans to real estate investors to fund their acquisition, renovation, development, rehabilitation, or improvement of properties. The Company’s primary underwriting criteria is a conservative loan to value ratio. The properties securing the loans are generally classified as residential or commercial real estate and, typically, are held for resale or investment. Each loan is secured by a first mortgage lien on real estate and is personally guaranteed by the principal(s) of the borrower. The Company also makes opportunistic real estate purchases apart from its lending activities.

    Forward Looking Statements

    This press release may contain forward-looking statements. All statements other than statements of historical facts contained in this press release, including statements regarding our future results of operations and financial position, strategy and plans, and our expectations for future operations, are forward-looking statements. Such forward-looking statements are subject to several risks, uncertainties and assumptions as described in the Annual Report on Form 10-K for 2024 to be filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) on or before March 31, 2025. Because of these risks, uncertainties and assumptions, any forward-looking events and circumstances discussed in this press release may not occur. You should not rely upon forward-looking statements as predictions of future events. Neither the Company nor any other person assumes responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of any of these forward-looking statements. The Company disclaims any duty to update any of these forward-looking statements. All forward-looking statements attributable to the Company are expressly qualified in their entirety by these cautionary statements as well as others made in this press release. You should evaluate all forward-looking statements made by the Company in the context of these risks and uncertainties.

    Investor & Media Contact:
    Email: investors@sachemcapitalcorp.com

    SACHEM CAPITAL CORP.
    CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
    (in thousands, except share data)
                 
           Years Ended
        December 31,
        2024    2023 
    Assets     (unaudited)       (audited)  
    Cash and cash equivalents   $ 18,066     $ 12,598  
    Investment securities (at fair value)     1,517       37,776  
    Loans held for investment (net of deferred loan fees of $1,950 and $4,647)     375,041       494,588  
    Allowance for credit losses     (18,470 )     (7,523 )
    Loans held for investments, net of allowances for credit losses     356,571       487,065  
    Loans held for sale (net, of valuation allowance of $4,880 and $0)     10,970        
    Interest and fees receivable, net     3,768       8,475  
    Due from borrowers, net     5,150       5,597  
    Real estate owned, net     18,574       3,462  
    Investments in limited liability companies     53,942       43,036  
    Investments in rental real estate, net     14,032       10,554  
    Property and equipment, net     3,222       3,373  
    Other assets     6,164       8,956  
    Total assets   $ 491,976     $ 620,892  
    Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity            
    Liabilities:            
    Notes payable (net of deferred financing costs of $3,713 and $6,048)   $ 226,526     $ 282,353  
    Repurchase agreements     33,708       26,461  
    Mortgage payable     1,002       1,081  
    Lines of credit     40,000       61,792  
    Accrued dividends payable           5,144  
    Accounts payable and accrued liabilities     4,377       2,322  
    Advances from borrowers     4,047       10,998  
    Below market lease intangible     665       665  
    Total liabilities     310,325       390,816  
    Commitments and Contingencies            
    Shareholders’ equity:            
    Preferred shares – $.001 par value; 5,000,000 shares authorized; 2,903,000 shares designated as Series A Preferred Stock; 2,306,748 and 2,029,923 shares of Series A Preferred Stock issued and outstanding at December 31, 2024 and December 31, 2023, respectively     2       2  
    Common stock – $.001 par value; 200,000,000 shares authorized; 46,965,306 and 46,765,483 issued and outstanding at December 31, 2024 and December 31, 2023, respectively     47       47  
    Additional paid-in capital     256,956       249,826  
    Accumulated other comprehensive income           316  
    Cumulative net earnings     35,518       75,089  
    Cumulative dividends paid     (110,872 )     (95,204 )
    Total shareholders’ equity     181,651       230,076  
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity   $ 491,976     $ 620,892  
    SACHEM CAPITAL CORP.
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
    (in thousands, except share and per share data)
                 
        Years Ended
        December 31, 
           2024   2023
    Revenues     (unaudited)       (audited)  
    Interest income from loans   $ 43,154     $ 49,265  
    Fee income from loans     8,594       10,699  
    Income from limited liability company investments     5,239       3,522  
    Other investment income     391       1,209  
    Other income     122       54  
    Total revenues     57,500       64,749  
                 
    Operating expenses            
    Interest and amortization of deferred financing costs     27,798       29,190  
    Compensation and employee benefits     6,824       6,932  
    General and administrative expenses     6,841       4,955  
    Provision for credit losses related to available-for-sale debt securities           809  
    Provision for credit losses related to loans held for investment     26,928       5,588  
    Change in valuation allowance, loans held for sale     4,880        
    Impairment loss on real estate owned     492       794  
    (Gain) loss on sale of real estate and property and equipment, net     (439 )     88  
    Other expenses     1,952       1,354  
    Total operating expenses     75,276       49,710  
    Operating (loss) income before other (loss) income     (17,776 )     15,039  
                 
    Other (loss) income            
    Gain on equity securities     178       860  
    Loss on sale of loans     (21,973 )      
    Total other (loss) income, net     (21,795 )     860  
    Net (loss) income     (39,571 )     15,899  
    Preferred stock dividend     (4,304 )     (3,795 )
    Net (loss) income attributable to common shareholders   $ (43,875 )   $ 12,104  
                 
    Basic (loss) earnings per Common Share   $ (0.93 )   $ 0.27  
    Diluted (loss) earnings per Common Share   $ (0.93 )   $ 0.27  
    Basic weighted average Common Shares outstanding     47,413,012       44,244,988  
    Diluted weighted average Common Shares outstanding     47,413,012       44,244,988  
    SACHEM CAPITAL CORP.
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
    (in thousands)
                 
        Years Ended
        December 31,
           2024       2023 
    CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES     (unaudited)       (audited)  
    Net (loss) income   $ (39,571 )   $ 15,899  
    Adjustments to reconcile net (loss) income to net cash provided by operating activities:            
    Amortization of deferred financing costs     2,456       2,415  
    Depreciation expense     372       266  
    Write-off of other assets – pre-offering costs           477  
    Stock-based compensation     863       823  
    Provision for credit losses related to available-for-sale debt securities           809  
    Provision for credit losses related to loans held for investment     26,928       5,588  
    Change in valuation allowance, loans held for sale     4,880        
    Loss on sale of Loans     21,973        
    Impairment loss on real estate owned     492       794  
    (Gain) loss on sale of real estate and property and equipment, net     (439 )     88  
    (Gain) on equity securities     (178 )     (860 )
    Changes in operating assets and liabilities:            
    Interest and fees receivable, net     1,574       (2,285 )
    Other assets     2,656       (3,596 )
    Due from borrowers, net     (689 )     (334 )
    Accounts payable and accrued liabilities     1,132       374  
    Deferred loan fees revenue     (2,697 )     287  
    Advances from borrowers     (6,951 )     1,106  
    Total adjustments and operating changes     52,372       5,952  
    NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES     12,801       21,851  
                 
    CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES              
    Purchase of investment securities     (7,767 )     (30,415 )
    Proceeds from the sale of investment securities     43,964       18,120  
    Purchase of interests in limited liability companies     (18,271 )     (13,896 )
    Proceeds from limited liability companies returns of capital     7,310       1,661  
    Proceeds from sale of loans, net     36,122        
    Proceeds from sale of real estate owned     2,613       450  
    Acquisitions of and improvements to real estate owned     (510 )     (229 )
    Proceeds from sale of property and equipment           1,299  
    Purchase of property and equipment     (203 )     (784 )
    Improvements in investment in rental real estate     (3,496 )     (10,845 )
    Principal disbursements for loans     (134,298 )     (204,885 )
    Principal collections on loans     154,654       167,036  
    NET CASH PROVIDED BY (USED IN) INVESTING ACTIVITIES     80,118       (72,488 )
                 
    CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES              
    Proceeds from lines of credit     27,959       58,204  
    Repayments on lines of credit     (49,751 )      
    Proceeds from repurchase agreements     19,055       14,028  
    Repayments of repurchase agreements     (11,808 )     (30,100 )
    (Repayment of) proceeds from mortgage payable     (79 )     331  
    Dividends paid on Common Shares     (16,507 )     (21,933 )
    Dividends paid on Series A Preferred Stock     (4,304 )     (3,795 )
    Proceeds from issuance of common shares, net of expenses     2,050       20,450  
    Repurchase of Common Shares     (1,489 )     (226 )
    Proceeds from issuance of Series A Preferred Stock, net of expenses     5,706       2,563  
    Repayment of notes payable     (58,283 )      
    NET CASH (USED IN) PROVIDED BY FINANCING ACTIVITIES     (87,451 )     39,522  
                 
    NET INCREASE (DECREASE) IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS     5,468       (11,115 )
                 
    CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS – BEGINNING OF PERIOD     12,598       23,713  
                 
    CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS – END OF PERIOD   $ 18,066     $ 12,598  

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI New Zealand: Speech to KangaNews Debt Capital Markets Forum

    Source: New Zealand Government

    Opening
    Good afternoon. I’m excited to be here at the KangaNews Debt Capital Markets Forum. 
    It’s a pleasure to be here with all of you – investors, financial institutions, and wholesale market participants who play a vital role in unlocking New Zealand’s economic future.
    I’d like to thank ANZ for hosting this event and for inviting me to speak. 
    Debt capital markets are fundamental to the success of the Government’s plan to go for growth. 
    Capital is like water to a seed – it enables New Zealanders, businesses, government, and NGOs to action and grow their bright-ideas, ambitions, and aspirations. 
    The deeper our capital markets get, the more opportunities our country will have to thrive. 
    Today, I want to discuss how the Government is unlocking growth and overcoming funding and financing challenges in housing and infrastructure in a fiscally constrained environment. 
    I will also be announcing actions Cabinet has recently agreed to that will reduce debt financing barriers for Community Housing Providers. 
    Unlocking growth
    New Zealanders have said that inflation and the economy are in the top three issues facing the country. 
    The only sustainable way to fix the cost-of-living crisis is to ensure wages grow faster than inflation. 
    That means growing the economy through more high-paying jobs, increased productivity, greater innovation, and more investment. 
    The best thing the Government can do to support this is:

    one ensuring systems, regulations, and laws are growth-enabling – like the Resource Management Act, and
    two getting interest rates lower. 

    Now, the Government doesn’t set the Official Cash Rate (OCR) – that’s the Reserve Bank’s job – but we can help support lower interest rates through responsible fiscal management, getting the government’s books back in order, and investing in productivity-enhancing infrastructure. 
    That’s what we have been doing, and since we came into Government the OCR has dropped 175 basis points.
    In Budget 2024, we found $5.9 billion on average in annual operating savings and revenue, and $3.1 billion in capital savings and revenue over the forecast period. We reprioritised savings to fund tax relief and cost pressures in Health, and to support other growth-enabling initiatives. 
    For us, it’s about ensuring every public dollar goes to its best use. Greater value for money means we can provide more and higher quality services that people need. 
    Budget 2025 will be no different. 
    Without swerving too far into the Minister of Finance’s lane – I can say that Budget 2025 will focus on four areas:

    Lifting economic growth through measures to tackle New Zealand’s long-term productivity challenges,
    Using a social investment approach to improve life outcomes for people with high needs,
    Keeping tight control of government spending, while funding high-priority commitments and cost pressures, and
    Developing a pipeline of long-term infrastructure investments.

    In terms of infrastructure, this Government has and will continue to invest a record amount. More than $68 billion in capital is forecast to be spent by central government on infrastructure over the next five years. 
    For comparison from 2019 to 2023, $50.8 billion in capital was spent on infrastructure.
    Infrastructure Investment Summit 
    However, we know achieving economic growth is not all about government. We can’t unlock New Zealand’s potential without the private sector.
    So, we are also focused on attracting long-term private capital, capacity, and capability into our economy.
    To do this, earlier this month, the Prime Minister and I hosted the New Zealand Infrastructure Investment Summit in Auckland, which was attended by over 100 world-leading institutional investors, private investment firms, and construction companies.
    It was a huge win for our country, and it was good to see some of you there.
    During the Summit, we reaffirmed New Zealand’s position as being open for business, and as a safe and strong country to invest in.
    Overall, we focused on three areas:

    First, New Zealand’s infrastructure vision and upcoming public infrastructure opportunities,
    Second, changes to policy, regulation, and legislation to make it easier to do business here, and
    Third, other investment opportunities in growth sectors and the Māori economy.

    I just want to briefly touch on the first area. 
    It was great to get investable and developable opportunities in public infrastructure to market, including Christchurch Men’s Prison PPP and the Northland RoNS PPP. 
    But as Minister for Infrastructure, I think showcasing our long-term infrastructure pipeline made the biggest impression.
    This is what will give the private sector confidence to stay here and invest in people and equipment. 
    Firms just want to know: What’s next.
    For example, the Italian tunnelling company Ghella was preparing to leave New Zealand after completing the 16.2-kilometre Central Interceptor tunnel in Auckland. But following presentations on the pipeline and the positivity of the Summit, Ghella have decided to keep their workers, expertise, and tens of millions of dollars of plant, equipment, and associated services here. 
    Similarly, Plenary, an infrastructure investment firm managing more than $100 billion in assets has also committed to opening an office in New Zealand and to bidding on at least five PPPs over the next five years due to the PPP pipeline.
    Many global firms showed an interest in New Zealand. 
    When Guido Cacciaguerra of Webuild, a multinational construction and civil engineering firm, said “the Italians are coming back”, all I could think was – yes, that’s fantastic. 
    These guys helped us construct tunnels for the Tongariro hydro scheme in the 1960s. 
    It’s partnerships like these we need to help us close our infrastructure deficit, and we are committed to keep this momentum going.
    Overcoming funding and financing challenges in infrastructure and housing
    Now, let’s move onto overcoming funding and financing challenges in infrastructure and housing. 
    Public infrastructure in New Zealand has historically been primarily funded by taxpayers or ratepayers.
    But our heavy reliance on this blunt approach is not serving us well and has led to perverse outcomes including congestion, run-down assets, and the unresponsive provision infrastructure – contributing to unaffordable housing.
    The scale of New Zealand’s infrastructure challenge means we cannot continue the status quo – we need to leverage private capital and alternative funding and financing tools. 
    I want to outline several pieces of work that interact with debt capital markets, including:

    The establishment of the National Infrastructure Funding and Financing Ltd– or NIFFCo,
    Treasury’s new Funding and Financing Framework,
    The refresh of the Government’s PPP policies, and
    New funding and financing tools for infrastructure to support growth.

    Establishment of NIFFCo
    Let’s start with NIFFCo. 
    On 1 December 2024, we established NIFFCo to carry out three key functions: 

    Its first function is to act as the Crown’s ‘shopfront’ to facilitate private sector investment and interest in infrastructure – this includes receiving and evaluating any Market Led Proposals, or Unsolicited Bids.
    Its second function is to partner with agencies, and in some cases, local government, to provide expertise on projects involving complex procurement, alternative funding mechanisms and private finance – including PPPs and IFF Act transactions.
    Its third function is to administer central government infrastructure funds.

    When you decide to join us in transforming New Zealand’s infrastructure, you will likely work with NIFFCo. 
    Overall, I expect NIFFCo will help unlock access to capital for infrastructure and give the private sector a clear and knowledgeable Government-side partner to work with on projects and transactions.
    So, if you want to put forward a project, are looking for an opportunity to invest in New Zealand infrastructure or want to partner with Government – NIFFCo is open for business.
    NIFFCo will also lift the government’s commercial capability and help us be a better client of infrastructure. It will do this by deploying expertise into agencies that are working on projects involving private finance and alternative funding mechanisms.
    This includes, but is not limited to, projects involving traditional loans, equity investments, PPPs, developer levies, beneficiary levies, concessions, or other value uplift mechanisms.
    Funding and Financing Framework
    Now, let’s talk about Treasury’s new Funding and Financing Framework. 
    Last year, Treasury released this Framework to broaden the funding base for Crown investments, and to utilise private capital where efficient.
    It provides guidance to agencies that they should, in the first instance, seek user or beneficiary pays to fund new infrastructure projects rather than defaulting to taxpayer money.
    I expect proposals from sectors like transport, water, energy, housing, and adaptation to demonstrate how user or beneficiary pays can contribute towards funding.
    More utilisation of user- and beneficiary-pays will provide greater opportunities for the private sector, including debt capital markets, to participate in public investments.
    We want to use the government’s balance sheet more strategically and apply good commercial disciplines when deciding how to financially support a proposal – essentially providing “just enough support” to make proposals feasible.
    This will mean we can deliver more projects, and channel support to sectors where it is appropriate for the Crown to be the primary funder, like in health and education.
    PPP Framework and other guidance 
    To match our more commercial Funding and Financing Framework – we also needed to modernise the Crown’s policies and contracts, particularly in the PPP space.
    After extensive engagement, in November last year, we released a Blueprint outlining how the government will approach future PPPs.
    There are several key elements in the refreshed Blueprint that will foster a more appealing market for all participants:

    A more practical approach to risk transfer,
    Guidance for agencies on bid cost recognition,
    Enhancing the Interactive Tender Process,
    Allowing reasonable price validation to occur during the procurement process,
    Improving the process for managing claims and dispute resolution, and
    Increasing the capability and resourcing of the Crown so that we can be a better client.

    Our approach is to be smart about private capital and use it in a way that unlocks investment, enhances incentives for on-time on-budget delivery, and brings more maturity to the design, build, and maintenance of projects.
    The new PPP Blueprint sits alongside new Strategic Leasing Guidance, and Guideline for Market Led Proposals.
    New infrastructure funding and financing tools to get more houses built
    Let’s move onto new infrastructure funding and financing tools to get more houses built.
    As Minister of Housing, I am committed to – well, more accurately obsessed with – fixing our housing crisis.
    We are not a small country by land mass, but our restrictive planning system, particularly restrictions on the supply of urban land, has created a scorching hot land and housing market driven by artificial scarcity. 
    We are changing that by allowing our cities to grow up and out. But this won’t be enough on its own. We also need to enable the timely provision of enabling infrastructure. 
    Put simply, you can’t have housing without water, transport, and community facilities.
    However, under current settings councils, infrastructure providers, and developers face significant challenges to fund and finance enabling infrastructure for housing.
    We want to move to a future state where funding and financing tools enable the responsive supply of infrastructure where it is commercially viable to build new houses. 
    This will shift market expectations of future scarcity, bring down the cost of land for new housing, and improve incentives to develop land sooner instead of land banking.
    To achieve this future, our overarching approach is that growth pays for growth.
    Last month, I announced five changes to our infrastructure funding and financing toolkit to support urban growth. 
    I won’t cover all of these. But the most relevant to you are changes to the Infrastructure Funding and Financing Act (IFF) Act. 
    The IFF Act allows the creation of a Special Purpose Vehicle to raise finance for projects, where the cost is repaid through a levy charged to properties that benefit from a project over a period of about 20 to 30 years.
    We are making several remedial amendments to improve the effectiveness of the Act, particularly for developer-led projects, which will make the process simpler and cheaper.
    We are also broadening the Act to enable levies to be charged for major transport projects – a gamechanger in New Zealand for funding city-shaping projects. 
    These changes will lead to the Act being more effective, efficient, and utilised more often. 
    I expect, private capital will have far more opportunity to support public infrastructure projects.
    Reducing debt financing barriers for CHPs 
    Now, I would like to move onto actions the Government is taking to reduce debt financing barriers for Community Housing Providers, or CHPs. 
    As I noted earlier, we are fixing the housing crisis by getting the underlying market fundamentals right. This is the single best thing we can do to make housing more affordable.
    At the same time, I recognise that these changes will take some time and that there will always be New Zealanders who need housing support. 
    This Government believes in social housing, and we believe the CHP sector and private capital have a greater role to play in this space. 
    Currently, CHPs account for 16% of our social homes – or around 13,000 houses. 
    My ambition for the social housing system is to create a level playing field between CHPs and Kāinga Ora.
    I’m obsessed with building houses across the housing continuum for people who need them. But I am agnostic as to whether those houses are delivered by CHPs or by the government.
    I call this competitive neutrality. In some areas and for some people, CHPs are the answer. In other areas, Kāinga Ora is the way to go.
    However, we don’t have competitive neutrality right now.
    As I am sure you are aware, Kāinga Ora can borrow at a small margin above the Crown’s cost of financing, while CHPs effectively get access to finance at commercial rates.
    Update on last year’s announcement
    In November last year, I outlined three actions we are taking to help CHPs access borrowing to deliver housing:
    The first was making $70 million of Operating Supplement available upfront, unlocking equity CHPs need to raise debt.
    The second was making changes to IRRS contracts that makes the revenue stream more attractive for financiers. 
    And the third was to review the use of leasing to provide social housing.
    I’ll just give you a quick update on where those are at. 
    The Ministry of Housing and Urban Development are implementing updated criteria for providing Operating Supplement upfront to support delivery of the 1,500 CHP places committed through Budget 2024. 
    The updated criteria will focus on the basics – strategic alignment, value for money, deliverability, and whether upfront funding is really needed to unlock financing. We are also removing unhelpful eligibility requirements and allowing larger CHPs and projects in urban areas to access upfront funding, where appropriate. 
    On updates to the IRRS contracts, HUD are making the following changes that will be in place for the contracting of places from late May onwards: 

    Additional compensation where the Termination for Convenience clause is exercised on Build to Lease projects,
    Limiting the ‘step-in’ period to six months, and
    Providing a Financier Direct Deed when requested on all Build to Own projects.

    These changes will go some way to reducing real and perceived risk to financiers, although I acknowledge that there is more work to do. 
    On the use of leasing to provide social housing, HUD has moved to an ownership-agnostic approach. 
    Leasing could be useful where CHPs want to leverage their local expertise in managing social housing, while partnering with developers who could leverage their larger balance sheets to access finance that a small CHP could not.
    CHP credit enhancement 
    Last year, I also announced that the Government would explore a credit enhancement intervention for CHPs, so that they can access suitable debt.
    I am pleased to announce today that Cabinet has agreed to establish Crown lending facilities of up to $150 million for the Community Housing Funding Agency (CHFA) to cover:

    an interim lending facility to be provided in early April to support CHFA’s immediate financing needs, and
    a final liquidity facility. 

    In addition to this, the Minister of Finance intends to offer a loan guarantee scheme to banks to support their CHP lending.
    Both of these interventions align with our market-led approach to fixing our housing crisis, and our transition to more efficient and effective Crown investment. 
    The liquidity facility and loan guarantee scheme will provide critical support whilst we get the system right. 
    Let’s start with CHFA – 
    CHFA was launched by Community Finance in 2024 and aggregates the finance requirements for CHPs around New Zealand, unlocking lower cost finance at scale to support the delivery of social housing.
    The CHFA is largest lender to CHPs in New Zealand already indicating they are providing lending solutions highly valued by the sector.
    A Crown liquidity facility and credit rating will allow CHFA to lend to more CHPs on a much larger scale.
    This will lay the foundation for CHFA to borrow billions of dollars, supporting not just the delivery of social housing, but also CHPs’ broader affordable housing portfolios. 
    Housing Australia has a similar model – the Affordable Housing Bond Aggregator (AHBA). 
    Since its inception in 2018, Housing Australia has approved around $4.5 billion in AHBA loans to support the development of more than 18,800 social and affordable homes. 
    The AHBA loans have helped the sector save an estimated $800 million in interest and fees.
    I want this for New Zealand too. 
    Finally, on the loan guarantee scheme, the Minister of Finance and I have endorsed key design criteria as a starting point for Government’s engagement with banks. 
    I don’t want to get into too much detail, I will leave that to officials –
    But, at a high-level, I expect that this scheme will encourage participation among banks and enable them to pass on meaningfully reduced interest rates and other lending accommodations to CHPs. 
    Relatedly, last year, the Minister of Finance wrote to the Reserve Bank asking them to look further at the risk weights for lending to CHPs. The Bank intends to consult on potential changes in the middle of 2025. This process may also lead to a meaningful reduction in borrowing costs for CHPs.
    Overall, I am really excited about how these changes will support the CHP sector – we heard you, and we hope these changes enable you to grow and do more good work.  
    Conclusion
    Delivering on this Government’s vision for growth and higher living standards will require a strong partnership between government, investors, and the private sector. 
    Capital markets will play a pivotal role in financing New Zealand’s infrastructure future, and I encourage all of you to explore how your expertise and resources can contribute to this effort.
    We are committed to creating a stable, predictable, and investable infrastructure and housing environment – one that supports economic growth, enhances productivity, and improves the quality of life for New Zealanders.
    Together, through innovation and partnership, I am confident we can build a more prosperous New Zealand.
    I look forward to your insights and collaboration.
    Thank you. 

    MIL OSI New Zealand News

  • MIL-OSI New Zealand: Property Market – New suburb-level property insights as NZ housing market turns a corner – CoreLogic

    Source: CoreLogic
    Property values across New Zealand are showing signs of recovery, with more than half of suburbs recording stable or rising prices in the first quarter of 2025.
    The latest Mapping the Market update from CoreLogic NZ provides suburb-level insights across 2,661 areas for houses and 1,077 areas for flats/townhouses, offering the most comprehensive view of property values in the country.
    CoreLogic NZ Chief Property Economist Kelvin Davidson said the data confirms that while affordability remains a challenge, improving market conditions are supporting a shift in property values.
    “New Zealand’s housing market has started to turn, driven largely by lower mortgage rates. Over the past three months, 54% of suburbs saw house values stabilise or increase, with a similar trend for flats or townhouses at 56%,” Mr Davidson said.
    “While this recovery is in its early stages, the strongest gains have tended to be concentrated in more affordable areas, where buyers appear to be capitalising on relatively lower property values.”
    Houses on the West Coast, particularly some suburbs in Buller and Grey District, saw values increase by 6% or more over the past quarter, reinforcing the role of affordability in driving market activity.
    Among the main centres, Dunedin’s Waldronville (3.9%), Hamilton’s Temple View (3.5%), and Christchurch’s Kainga (3.3%) recorded some of the strongest gains for standalone houses.
    For flats and townhouses, Glenleith in Dunedin (6.2%) and Grenada North in Wellington (4.8%) led the upturn, while areas such as Deanwell in Hamilton (4.1%) and Auckland North Shore’s Bayview (3.5%) also recorded notable growth.
    Mr Davidson said signs of stabilisation in previously weaker markets suggested demand was gradually beginning to return.
    “The number of suburbs experiencing price declines has narrowed, indicating the early stages of an upturn. Fewer than 230 suburbs saw house values drop by 2% or more over the past three months, while only 111 suburbs recorded similar declines for flats and townhouses,” he said.
    However, he cautioned that recovery remains uneven, with economic conditions, supply levels, and lending constraints continuing to influence local markets.
    “Some areas are stabilising or rising, but others remain affected by high listing volumes and economic uncertainty. The resurgence in values suggests improving sentiment, but we expect the pace of recovery to remain measured as affordability constraints and credit conditions limit momentum.”

    Enhanced market intelligence with new digital mapping

    The Mapping the Market online tool has been significantly expanded, now featuring suburb-level data split by property type. This enhanced dataset allows homebuyers, investors, and policymakers to assess value trends across different housing types using a single, standardised methodology.
    The interactive digital map, available at CoreLogic NZ Mapping the Market, provides current median values across every major suburb. With an intuitive interface, it offers a clear visual representation of where buyers can find properties within their budget.
    Mr Davidson said the latest insights reaffirm the affordability advantages of some regional markets.
    “Lower-priced housing markets are leading the recovery, particularly in West Coast districts such as Buller and Grey, where affordability remains a key driver. Suburbs within major centres, such as Waldronville in Dunedin and Temple View in Hamilton, are also showing signs of renewed demand.”

    NZ’s most expensive and affordable suburbs

    Auckland’s most expensive suburb remains Herne Bay, with a median house value of $3.15 million, while Oriental Bay tops the list in Wellington ($1.57 million) and Merivale in Christchurch ($1.33 million).
    For flats and townhouses, Queenstown continues to dominate, with median values in Queenstown Hill reaching $1.52 million, while Auckland’s Stonefields ($1.37 million) and Campbells Bay ($1.23 million) also rank among the highest.
    More affordable housing options remain available in regional areas, with median property values significantly lower in some parts of Buller and Grey Districts, as examples.

    A cautious recovery ahead

    While more suburbs are showing early signs of a market rebound, Mr Davidson expects the pace of growth to remain gradual due to economic conditions, high listing volumes, and credit constraints.
    “The downturn appears to be largely over, but the upturn in 2025 could be subdued,” he said.
    “The affordability gains seen in recent years are still in place and while lower interest rates may provide a lift, factors like high listings supply levels and restrained lending conditions to some degree – such as the debt to income ratio limits – could temper the recovery.”

    MIL OSI New Zealand News

  • MIL-OSI Global: Trump’s push for AI deregulation could put financial markets at risk

    Source: The Conversation – Canada – By Sana Ramzan, Assistant Professor in Business, University Canada West

    As Canada moves toward stronger AI regulation with the proposed Artificial Intelligence and Data Act (AIDA), its southern neighbour appears to be taking the opposite approach.

    AIDA, part of Bill C-27, aims to establish a regulatory framework to improve AI transparency, accountability and oversight in Canada, although some experts have argued it doesn’t go far enough.

    Meanwhile, United States President Donald Trump’s is pushing for AI deregulation. In January, Trump signed an executive order aimed at eliminating any perceived regulatory barriers to “American AI innovation.” The executive order replaced former president Joe Biden’s prior executive order on AI.




    Read more:
    How the US threw out any concerns about AI safety within days of Donald Trump coming to office


    Notably, the U.S. was also one of two countries — along with the U.K. — that didn’t sign a global declaration in February to ensure AI is “open, inclusive, transparent, ethical, safe, secure and trustworthy.”

    Eliminating AI safeguards leaves financial institutions vulnerable. This vulnerability can increase uncertainty and, in a worst-case scenario, increase the risk of systemic collapse.




    Read more:
    The Paris summit marks a tipping point on AI’s safety and sustainability


    The power of AI in financial markets

    AI’s potential in financial markets is undeniable. It can improve operational efficiency, perform real-time risk assessments, generate higher income and forecast predictive economic change.

    My research has found that AI-driven machine learning models not only outperform conventional approaches in identifying financial statement fraud, but also in detecting abnormalities quickly and effectively. In other words, AI can catch signs of financial mismanagement before they spiral into a disaster.

    In another study, my co-researcher and I found that AI models like artificial neural networks and classification and regression trees can predict financial distress with remarkable accuracy.

    Artificial neural networks are brain-inspired algorithms. Similar to how our brain sends messages through neurons to perform actions, these neural networks process information through layers of interconnected “artificial neurons,” learning patterns from data to make predictions.

    Similarly, classification and regression trees are decision-making models that divide data into branches based on important features to identify outcomes.

    Our artificial neural networks models predicted financial distress among Toronto Stock Exchange-listed companies with a staggering 98 per cent accuracy. This suggests suggests AI’s immense potential in providing early warning signals that could help avert financial downturns before they start.

    However, while AI can simplify manual processes and lower financial risks, it can also introduce vulnerabilities that, if left unchecked, could pose significant threats to economic stability.

    The risks of deregulation

    Trump’s push for deregulation could result in Wall Street and other major financial institutions gaining significant power over AI-driven decision-making tools with little to no oversight.

    When profit-driven AI models operate without the appropriate ethical boundaries, the consequences could be severe. Unchecked algorithms, especially in credit evaluation and trading, could worsen economic inequality and generate systematic financial risks that traditional regulatory frameworks cannot detect.

    Algorithms trained on biased or incomplete data may reinforce discriminatory lending practices. In lending, for instance, biased AI algorithms can deny loans to marginalized groups, widening wealth and inequality gaps.

    In addition, AI-powered trading bots, which are capable of executing rapid transactions, could trigger flash crashes in seconds, disrupting financial markets before regulators have time to respond. The flash crash of 2010 is a prime example where high-frequency trading algorithms aggressively reacted to market signals causing the Dow Jones Industrial Average to drop by 998.5 points in a matter of minutes.

    Furthermore, unregulated AI-driven risk models might overlook economic warning signals, resulting in substantial errors in monetary control and fiscal policy.

    Striking a balance between innovation and safety depends on the ability for regulators and policymakers to reduce AI hazards. While considering financial crisis of 2008, many risk models — earlier forms of AI — were wrong to anticipate a national housing market crash, which led regulators and financial institutions astray and exacerbated the crisis.

    A blueprint for financial stability

    My research underscores the importance of integrating machine learning methods within strong regulatory systems to improve financial oversight, fraud detection and prevention.

    Durable and reasonable regulatory frameworks are required to turn AI from a potential disruptor into a stabilizing force. By implementing policies that prioritize transparency and accountability, policymakers can maximize the advantages of AI while lowering the risks associated with it.

    A federally regulated AI oversight body in the U.S. could serve as an arbitrator, just like Canada’s Digital Charter Implementation Act of 2022 proposes the establishment of an AI and Data Commissioner. Operating with checks and balances inherent to democratic structures would ensure fairness in financial algorithms and stop biased lending policies and concealed market manipulation.

    Financial institutions would be required to open the “black box” of AI-driven alternatives by mandating transparency through explainable AI standards — guidelines that are aimed at making AI systems’ outputs more understandable and transparent to humans.

    Machine learning’s predictive capabilities could help regulators identify financial crises in real-time using early warning signs — similar to the model developed by my co-researcher and me in our study.

    However, this vision doesn’t end at national borders. Globally, the International Monetary Fund and the Financial Stability Board could establish AI ethical standards to curb cross-border financial misconduct.

    Crisis prevention or catalyst?

    Will AI still be the key to foresee and stop the next economic crisis, or will the lack of regulatory oversight cause a financial disaster? As financial institutions continue adopt AI-driven models, the absence of strong regulatory guardrails raises pressing concerns.

    Without proper safeguards in place, AI is not just a tool for economic prediction — it could become an unpredictable force capable of accelerating the next financial crisis.

    The stakes are high. Policymakers must act swiftly to regulate the increasing impact of AI before deregulation opens the path for an economic disaster.

    Without decisive action, the rapid adoption of AI in finance could outpace regulatory efforts, leaving economies vulnerable to unforeseen risks and potentially setting the stage for another global financial crisis.

    Sana Ramzan does not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organisation that would benefit from this article, and has disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

    ref. Trump’s push for AI deregulation could put financial markets at risk – https://theconversation.com/trumps-push-for-ai-deregulation-could-put-financial-markets-at-risk-251208

    MIL OSI – Global Reports

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: UK House Price Index for January 2025

    Source: United Kingdom – Government Statements

    Press release

    UK House Price Index for January 2025

    The UK HPI shows house price changes for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland.

    The January data shows:

    • on average, house prices have risen by 0.2% since December 2024
    • there has been an annual price rise of 4.9% which makes the average property in the UK valued at £269,000

    England

    In England the January data shows, on average, house prices rose by 0.2% since December 2024. The annual price rise of 4.8% takes the average property value to £291,000.

    The regional data for England indicates that:

    • London experienced the most significant monthly increase with a movement of 2.3%
    • Yorkshire and the Humber saw the greatest monthly price fall, with a fall of -0.6%
    • the North East experienced the greatest annual price rise, up by 9.1%
    • London saw the lowest annual price growth, with a rise of 2.3%

    Price change by region for England

    Region Average price January 2025 Annual change % since January 2024 Monthly change % since December 2024
    East Midlands £241,000 6.2 -0.4
    East of England £339,000 3 -0.2
    London £564,000 2.3 2.3
    North East £161,000 9.1 -0.1
    North West £210,000 6.8 -0.1
    South East £386,000 4.5 0.5
    South West £307,000 2.7 0.1
    West Midlands £245,000 5.3 0
    Yorkshire and the Humber £203,000 5.9 -0.6

    Repossession sales by volume for England

    The lowest numbers of repossession sales in November 2024 were in the East Midlands and East of England.

    The highest number of repossession sales in November 2024 was in London.

    Repossession sales November 2024
    East Midlands 1
    East of England 1
    London 13
    North East 12
    North West 12
    South East 6
    South West 2
    West Midlands 7
    Yorkshire and the Humber 4
    England 61

    Average price by property type for England

    Property type January 2025 January 2024 Difference %
    Detached £473,000 £453,000 4.4
    Semi-detached £286,000 £270,000 5.9
    Terraced £242,000 £228,000 5.8
    Flat/maisonette £225,000 £221,000 2
    All £291,000 £278,000 4.8

    Funding and buyer status for England

    Transaction type Average price January 2025 Annual price change % since January 2024 Monthly price change % since December 2024
    Cash £278,000 4.1 0.2
    Mortgage £297,000 5.1 0.2
    First-time buyer £245,000 5.3 0.1
    Former owner occupier £354,000 4.2 0.4

    Building status for England

    Building status* Average price November 2024 Annual price change % since November 2023 Monthly price change % since October 2024
    New build £438,000 22.7 9.5
    Existing resold property £284,000 2.3 -0.7

    *Figures for the 2 most recent months are not being published because there are not enough new build transactions to give a meaningful result.

    London

    London shows, on average, house prices decreased by 2.3% since December 2024. House prices have shown an annual price increase of 2.3%, meaning the average price of a property is £564,000.

    Average price by property type for London

    Property type January 2025 January 2024 Difference %
    Detached £1,147,000 £1,115,000 2.9
    Semi-detached £714,000 £684,000 4.4
    Terraced £638,000 £613,000 4
    Flat/maisonette £449,000 £446,000 0.7
    All £564,000 £551,000 2.3

    Funding and buyer status for London

    Transaction type Average price January 2025 Annual price change % since January 2024 Monthly price change % since December 2024
    Cash £602,000 0.3 3.3
    Mortgage £556,000 2.9 2
    First-time buyer £484,000 2.4 1.9
    Former owner occupier £699,000 2.2 2.8

    Building status for London

    Building status* Average price November 2024 Annual price change % since November 2023 Monthly price change % since October 2024
    New build £590,000 18.7 8.6
    Existing resold property £550,000 0 -1.7

    *Figures for the 2 most recent months are not being published because there are not enough new build transactions to give a meaningful result.

    Wales

    Wales shows, on average, house prices rose by 0.9% since December 2024. An annual price increase of 6% takes the average property value to £210,000

    There were 4 repossession sales for Wales in October 2024.

    Average price by property type for Wales

    Property type January 2025 January 2024 Difference %
    Detached £331,000 £314,000 5.2
    Semi-detached £208,000 £195,000 6.5
    Terraced £166,000 £156,000 6.2
    Flat/maisonette £131,000 £125,000 5.1
    All £210,000 £198,000 6

    Funding and buyer status for Wales

    Transaction type Average price January 2025 Annual price change % since January 2024 Monthly price change % since December 2024
    Cash £210,000 5.6 1.5
    Mortgage £209,000 6.1 0.5
    First-time buyer £180,000 6.4 0.6
    Former owner occupier £251,000 5.5 1.1

    Building status for Wales

    Building status* Average price November 2024 Annual price change % since November 2023 Monthly price change % since October 2024
    New build £375,000 23.3 9.4
    Existing resold property £206,000 3 0.6

    *Figures for the 2 most recent months are not being published because there are not enough new build transactions to give a meaningful result.

    UK house prices

    UK house prices rose by 4.9% in the year to January 2025, up from the revised estimate of 4.6% in the 12 months to December 2024. On a non-seasonally adjusted basis, average house prices in the UK increased by 0.2% between December 2024 and January 2025, compared with a decrease of 0.1% from the same period 12 months ago (December 2023 and January 2024).

    The UK Property Transactions Statistics showed that in January 2025, on a seasonally adjusted basis, the estimated number of transactions of residential properties with a value of £40,000 or greater was 95,000. This is 14.4% higher than a year ago (January 2024). Between December 2024 and January 2025, UK transactions decreased by 1% on a seasonally adjusted basis.

    House price monthly increase was highest in London where prices increased by 2.3% in the year to January 2025. The highest annual growth was in the the North East, where prices increased by 9.1% in the year to January 2025.

    See the economic statement.

    The UK HPI is based on completed housing transactions. Typically, a house purchase can take 6 to 8 weeks to reach completion. As with other indicators in the housing market, which typically fluctuate from month to month, it is important not to put too much weight on one month’s set of house price data.

    Access the full UK HPI

    Background

    1. We publish the UK House Price Index (HPI) on the second or third Wednesday of each month with Northern Ireland figures updated quarterly. We will publish the February 2025 UK HPI at 9:30am on Wednesday 16 April 2025. See calendar of release dates.
    2. We have made some changes to improve the accuracy of the UK HPI. We are not publishing average price and percentage change for new builds and existing resold property as done previously because there are not currently enough new build transactions to provide a reliable result. This means that in this month’s UK HPI reports, new builds and existing resold property are reported in line with the sales volumes currently available.
    3. The UK HPI revision period has been extended to 13 months, following a review of the revision policy (see calculating the UK HPI section 4.4). This ensures the data used is more comprehensive.
    4. Sales volume data is available by property status (new build and existing property) and funding status (cash and mortgage) in our downloadable data tables. Transactions that require us to create a new register, such as new builds, are more complex and require more time to process. Read revisions to the UK HPI data.
    5. Revision tables are available for England and Wales within the downloadable data in CSV format. See about the UK HPI for more information.
    6. HM Land Registry, Registers of Scotland, Land & Property Services/Northern Ireland Statistics and Research Agency and the Valuation Office Agency supply data for the UK HPI.
    7. The Office for National Statistics (ONS) and Land & Property Services/Northern Ireland Statistics and Research Agency calculate the UK HPI. It applies a hedonic regression model that uses the various sources of data on property price, including HM Land Registry’s Price Paid Dataset, and attributes to produce estimates of the change in house prices each month. Find out more about the methodology used from the ONS and Northern Ireland Statistics & Research Agency.
    8. We take the UK Property Transaction statistics  from the HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC) monthly estimates of the number of residential and non-residential property transactions in the UK and its constituent countries. The number of property transactions in the UK is highly seasonal, with more activity in the summer months and less in the winter. This regular annual pattern can sometimes mask the underlying movements and trends in the data series. HMRC presents the UK aggregate transaction figures on a seasonally adjusted basis. We make adjustments for both the time of year and the construction of the calendar, including corrections for the position of Easter and the number of trading days in a particular month.
    9. UK HPI seasonally adjusted series are calculated at regional and national levels only. See data tables.
    10. The first estimate for new build average price (April 2016 report) was based on a small sample which can cause volatility. A three-month moving average has been applied to the latest estimate to remove some of this volatility.
    11. The UK HPI reflects the final transaction price for sales of residential property. Using the geometric mean, it covers purchases at market value for owner-occupation and buy-to-let, excluding those purchases not at market value (such as re-mortgages), where the ‘price’ represents a valuation.
    12. HM Land Registry provides information on residential property transactions for England and Wales, collected as part of the official registration process for properties that are sold for full market value.
    13. The HM Land Registry dataset contains the sale price of the property, the date when the sale was completed, full address details, the type of property (detached, semi-detached, terraced or flat), if it is a newly built property or an established residential building and a variable to indicate if the property has been purchased as a financed transaction (using a mortgage) or as a non-financed transaction (cash purchase).
    14. Repossession sales data is based on the number of transactions lodged with HM Land Registry by lenders exercising their power of sale.
    15. For England, we show repossession sales volume recorded by government office region. For Wales, we provide repossession sales volume for the number of repossession sales.
    16. Repossession sales data is available from April 2016 in CSV format. Find out more information about repossession sales.
    17. We publish CSV files of the raw and cleansed aggregated data every month for England, Scotland and Wales. We publish Northern Ireland data on a quarterly basis. They are available for free use and re-use under the Open Government Licence.
    18. HM Land Registry is a government department created in 1862. Its vision is: “A world-leading property market as part of a thriving economy and a sustainable future.”
    19. HM Land Registry’s purpose is: “We protect your land ownership and provide services and data that underpin an efficient and informed property market.”
    20. HM Land Registry safeguards land and property ownership valued at £8 trillion, enabling over £1 trillion worth of personal and commercial lending to be secured against property across England and Wales. The Land Register contains more than 26.5 million titles showing evidence of ownership for more than 89% of the land mass of England and Wales.
    21. For further information about HM Land Registry visit www.gov.uk/land-registry.
    22. Follow us on @HMLandRegistry, our blogLinkedIn and Facebook.

    Contact

    Press Office

    Trafalgar House
    1 Bedford Park
    Croydon
    CR0 2AQ

    Email HMLRPressOffice@landregistry.gov.uk

    Phone (Monday to Friday 8:30am to 5:30pm) 0300 006 3365

    Mobile (5:30pm to 8:30am weekdays, all weekend and public holidays) 07864 689 344

    Updates to this page

    Published 26 March 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI Australia: Statement – Commonwealth Budget

    Source: Northern Territory Police and Fire Services

    As part of ACT Government’s ‘One Government, One Voice’ program, we are transitioning this website across to our . You can access everything you need through this website while it’s happening.

    Released 25/03/2025

    The ACT Government welcomes the wide range of initiatives in the 2025-26 Commonwealth Budget that will benefit Canberrans and our city.

    Continued cost of living relief for all Canberrans

    The ACT Government welcomes new relief for Canberrans who need it most, with tax cuts across the board including a further exemption for low-income earners with increases to the Medicare levy low-income thresholds.

    We also know that Canberra households have faced significantly rising costs over the past two years, which thankfully have started to moderate. The $150 Energy Bill Relief for every household in the ACT will provide much needed relief for nearly two hundred thousand Canberra households as well as small businesses.

    Across the five jurisdictions in the National Electricity Market, the ACT is expected to have the lowest standing offers in 2025-26 – the future is renewable.

    Additionally, the Commonwealth Government’s largest investment in Medicare since its inception will help take some of the pressure off our hospital system and continue to ensure Canberrans get the care they need when they need it.

    Canberrans deserve to be able to access bulk-billed GPs and appropriately funding primary care is critical to address the complexities of demand in our health system.

    Funding for an additional urgent care clinic in Woden is delivered through the budget, as is a boost to the Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme that will benefit all Canberrans.

    Canberrans are more likely than any other Australians to have a tertiary qualification and so will disproportionately benefit from further reductions in HECS-HELP debts; we want more Canberrans to attain tertiary qualifications for the jobs of the future and for more Australians to choose our great universities as their preferred place of study.

    Housing

    The ACT Government remains committed to delivering on the targets set out in the National Housing Accord and we are working to deliver above our per capita share of the national target of 1.2 million homes. We know that increasing housing supply will improve housing affordability, access and choice for Canberrans.

    The ACT Government welcomes the increased income and property price caps under the Government’s Help to Buy scheme which will support more Canberrans to enter the housing market with lower deposits and smaller mortgages. Purchase of homes of up to $1 million in Canberra will now be supported under the scheme, up from $750,000.

    The ACT’s apprentices in residential construction will benefit from $10,000 in cost of living completion payments, which will support the construction industry to build more homes.

    National Capital Investment Framework

    The ACT Government welcomes this additional investment into major transport infrastructure across our city.

    We will continue to work in partnership with the Commonwealth Government to deliver projects that create local jobs and strengthen our economy.

    This pipeline of investment supports our broader strategic objectives for transport planning including unlocking land for more housing, new public transport routes and improving connections with our surrounding region.

    The Budget commits another $53.5 million as part of the 2025-26 to support the next stage of growth and ensure projects across the territory can actually be delivered. This includes:

    • $30 million to complete the Monaro Highway Upgrade
    • $20 million to complete for the Monaro Highway Upgrade Stage 2 Upgrades
    • $3.5 million to complete the duplication of Gundaroo Drive

    The Budget also provides a $30 million boost over five years for the ACT under the Roads to Recovery program, which will go directly to maintaining the ACT’s existing road network. This includes $8.6 million for resurfacing the Kings Highway near Kowen.

    Under the previous Commonwealth Government, Commonwealth infrastructure investment for Canberra lagged behind the rest of the country.

    Public Service

    A strong Australian Public Service is crucial to Canberra’s economy and local businesses. The ACT Government welcomes the continued strong support for the Public Service by the Commonwealth Government which has supported continued low unemployment and strong wage growth across the broader economy.

    Over this term of government, the Commonwealth Government has supported this growth in the APS across every part of our city. The ACT Government welcomes the continued investment in the National Security Office Precinct which started construction earlier this year.

    An alternative approach of severe and prolonged cuts to the Australian Public Service would be an attack on Canberra’s economy and local businesses.

    National Broadband Network

    The ACT will be the largest proportionate beneficiary from a $3 billion investment the National Broadband Network. This investment will see 100,000 more Canberrans connected with faster and more reliable internet by upgrading remaining fibre-to-the node (FTTN) network.

    – Statement ends –

    Chris Steel, MLA | Media Releases

    «ACT Government Media Releases | «Minister Media Releases

    MIL OSI News

  • MIL-OSI Australia: Interview with Raf Epstein, Melbourne Mornings, ABC Radio

    Source: Australian Parliamentary Secretary to the Minister for Industry

    Raf Epstein:

    Jim Chalmers has delivered his fourth Budget. He’s the federal Treasurer. Good morning.

    Jim Chalmers:

    Good morning, Raf. How are you?

    Epstein:

    I’m good. Look, people on $45 grand might really need it, but people earning $200 grand don’t need an extra $500 a year in a tax cut. High earners are getting tax cuts. Why?

    Chalmers:

    Well, every Australian taxpayer’s getting another 2 tax cuts in addition to the one that started rolling out in July. And that’s what we’re doing in the Budget. We’re topping up the tax cuts.

    And when you cut the bottom rate from 19 cents all the way down to 14 cents, that flows to every taxpayer. That’s just how the tax system works. But the benefits will be disproportionately felt for people on lower incomes, younger people, people entering the workforce, and that’s deliberate.

    Epstein:

    Why are high income earners getting it? I just want to understand the rationale. You and I don’t need that money. It could be better spent by the government, it could be targeted at people who need it. Why are we getting it?

    Chalmers:

    Because the way the tax system works is it’s a marginal tax system and when you cut the bottom rate, it means that every taxpayer benefits and the –

    Epstein:

    – that’s an explanation. That’s not a reason.

    Chalmers:

    The only easy way to limit the tax cuts is to provide it in people’s tax returns. We’ve done that in the past, but we wanted to make this a weekly, enduring, ongoing benefit to people. The benefit, when you combine our 3 tax cuts together is an average tax cut of about $50 a week.

    You ask me about cost‑of‑living relief more broadly. It’s not the only thing we’re doing. You know, strengthening Medicare is about out of pocket health costs, cheaper medicines, energy bill rebates, cutting student debt. These are all of the ways that we are responsibly helping people with the cost of living.

    Epstein:

    Without an election, would there have been tax cuts?

    Chalmers:

    Yes, we’re very keen to top up the tax cuts which started flowing in July. And that’s because we recognise that even though we’re making a heap of very encouraging progress in the fight against inflation, we’ve got inflation down lower and earlier in the budget than was expected, even at the end of last year.

    But we know that people are still under pressure and so we’re providing cost‑of‑living relief, really one of the main focuses in the Budget. And, and we’re doing that in a whole bunch of ways and giving people 2 more tax cuts to top up the tax cuts, which are already flowing, is a very effective way of doing that.

    Epstein:

    Jim Chalmers, as Treasurer, your shared equity scheme, it is extra help for some people to buy a house, but there’s not much for most people trying to buy a house. Why do you keep kicking that can down the road?

    Chalmers:

    I don’t think we are. You know, the Help to Buy scheme, the expansion means about 40 – helping about 40,000 Australians into the housing market. That’s a significant amount of people. But it’s not the only thing we’re doing in housing.

    There’s about $33 billion being invested in housing in all kinds of responsible ways, from social and affordable housing to the Help to Buy scheme, to working with the states to open up new estates and make sure that it’s got the infrastructure that it needs.

    We’re investing in housing in a whole bunch of ways. We know that there’s a shortage. It’s one of the big challenges in our economy, as you and I have spoken about, I think, on a number of occasions, Raf and that’s why we’re doing something about it.

    Epstein:

    But aren’t those changes on the edges? The big changes are how we incentivise people to build wealth. Negative gearing, capital gains, like that’s the big lever that you haven’t pulled?

    Chalmers:

    We haven’t. That’s correct. But whether it’s cost of living or housing, it’s best not to look at any one measure in isolation. You look across what we’re doing in housing, we’ve got the most ambitious housing programme of any government in my lifetime.

    Epstein:

    Are you scared of negative gearing changes?

    Chalmers:

    We’re not going down that route because we’re not convinced that it would build more homes to change that. We’ve made that clear. And our emphasis is on housing supply. We want to build more homes, 1.2 million homes in the next 5 years. That’s going to be difficult. It’s ambitious, but it’s achievable if everybody does their bit.

    We’ve shown a willingness and enthusiasm to invest in housing because we know it’s the source of a lot of this cost‑of‑living pressure, which is still hanging around. We know we don’t have enough homes. That’s why we’re acting decisively with $33 billion of investment.

    Epstein:

    Jim Chalmers is the Treasurer on 774. We’ll have a word to the Shadow Treasurer, Angus Taylor, soon as well.

    Treasurer, if you had 60 seconds in a lift with Donald Trump, what would you say to him?

    Chalmers:

    I think I’d tell President Trump, exactly what I told his Treasury Secretary in Washington D.C. a few weeks ago. Ours is an economic relationship of mutual benefit. They run a big trade surplus with us, they enjoy tariff‑free access to our markets. We believe that should be taken into consideration and we will always speak up for and stand up for our interests.

    Epstein:

    Do you think he cares about Australia?

    Chalmers:

    I don’t think that’s a question really for me. You’d have to ask him. But I do believe whoever is in the White House and whoever is in the Lodge, this is such an important economic relationship and security relationship, it benefits both countries. And we will continue to make our case to stand up and speak for our interests.

    We don’t want to trade away the things that we’re proud of in Australia, things like the Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme that I invested in in the Budget. We want to make sure that we’re strengthening that because Australians need us to, not weakening it because American multinationals want us to. So that’s been in the mix. That’s been some of the things that have been discussed. I would make the same points to President Trump that I made to his Treasury Secretary.

    Epstein:

    You did pull a bit of a rabbit out of your hat with the tax cuts last night. One thing you did not mention is Melbourne’s suburban rail loop. Why not?

    Chalmers:

    Because we’d already funded that. As you know, I think the funding got released a few weeks ago. But that’s been in our, that $2 billion or so has been in our budget for a while. Usually in the Budget speech, you mentioned the new things.

    Epstein:

    You don’t think it’s a sketchy project, you’ve got faith in it?

    Chalmers:

    Well, it’s cleared the hurdles. And So we’re providing that $2 billion. We believe in it. We think it’s a project worthy of Commonwealth investment. That’s why Catherine King, my colleague, has been working closely with the Victorians to provide and release that funding for Suburban Rail Loop. But in the Budget speech last night, we focused on Sunshine Station because that’s part of a big new investment we’re making in the Airport Rail line.

    Epstein:

    Tobacco excise. I think it’s about $1.40 of tax per cigarette at the moment. That is failing in your Budget. You’re taking in even less money than you thought you would. It’s failing on the streets. Why are you sticking with that while shops are burning?

    Chalmers:

    There are 2 reasons why tobacco excise is down. There’s a good reason and there’s a bad reason. Good reason is more people giving it away. But I do acknowledge the essence of your question, which is we’ve got a challenge here and too many people are avoiding the excise, and that’s why we’ve actually invested a substantial amount of money and resources in the Budget last night to try and crack down on people avoiding the excise. There’s a lot of money in the Budget for compliance and enforcement because we do have a problem there. I acknowledge that. We’re doing something about it.

    Epstein:

    Will we ever get a surplus?

    Chalmers:

    We’ve delivered 2 surpluses, Raf.

    Epstein:

    I’m talking looking forward.

    Chalmers:

    I know, but this is too easily lost. When we came to office, there were deficits in every year, we turned 2 of them into surpluses. And we’ve shrunk the deficit this year and that’s helping us get debt down this year by $177 billion. I think that is too easily lost.

    We do acknowledge there are structural issues in the budget in the medium term and in the longer term. That’s what’s motivated us in terms of making spending on the NDIS and in aged care more sustainable. We have made a structural difference, a structural improvement to the budget over time with those measures. But the work of budget repair is ongoing.

    In every single one of our 4 Budgets, we’ve had savings. We’ve tried to. When we’re investing money in helping with the cost of living or strengthening Medicare, we’ve done it in the most responsible way that we can, which recognises these pressures on the budget.

    Epstein:

    Thanks so much for your time this morning.

    Chalmers:

    Appreciate it, Raf. All the best.

    Epstein:

    Jim Chalmers there, the federal Treasurer.

    MIL OSI News

  • MIL-Evening Report: A $33 billion vote-grabber or real relief? Examining the Albanese government’s big housing pledge

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Ehsan Noroozinejad, Senior Researcher, Urban Transformations Research Centre, Western Sydney University

    Man As Thep/Shutterstock

    The Australian housing market is in crisis: soaring prices, increasing rental stress, declining home ownership rates and a growing number of people experiencing homelessness.

    In response, Prime Minister Anthony Albanese has announced a $33 billion housing investment plan as part of his government’s latest budget.




    Read more:
    At a glance: the 2025 federal budget


    This is a central plank of Labor’s re-election pitch, aimed at showing housing commitment by:

    Making it easier to buy, better to rent, and building more homes faster.

    What are the key features of the plan?

    The plan includes two headline measures aimed at boosting housing supply and helping buyers:

    1-Expanding ‘Help to Buy’ for first-home buyers:

    The Help to Buy program provides shared-equity loans to first-time homebuyers so they can purchase properties with smaller deposits. Under this program, the government buys a portion of the property to lower the required mortgage amount for buyers.

    Under the initial terms of the scheme, the Commonwealth offered up to 30% of the price for existing homes and 40% for new constructions, while restricting eligibility to households within specific income and property value ranges.

    Now, the Albanese government has raised cap levels to enable more people to become eligible. The income ceiling for single buyers will increase from $90,000 to $100,000, while the maximum income limit for couples and single parents will rise from $120,000 to $160,000.

    These higher caps mean more than five million Australian properties would fall under the scheme’s scope, significantly expanding buyers’ choice.

    2-Investing in prefabricated and modular homes:

    In November 2024, the Albanese government announced a $900 million productivity fund to reward states and territories that boost housing supply by removing barriers to prefab and modular construction.

    And now, the Albanese government is budgeting another $54 million for the advanced manufacturing of prefab and modular housing industry. This includes $5 million to create a national certification system to streamline approvals and eliminate red tape.

    This aims to speed up home construction through off-site manufacturing technologies, which produce components in factories before assembling them on-site.

    Minister for Industry and Science Ed Husic claims these homes can be finished in half the time of conventional construction. Even a 20–30% time saving would be significant.

    These buildings are also more energy efficient, more resilient and cheaper.

    A crane lifts part of a modular home into place.
    benik.at/Shutterstock

    Can these measures fix the problem?

    The big picture problem is, Australia has simply not been building enough homes for its growing population.

    According to the Urban Development Institute of Australia’s State of the Land Report 2025, the federal government will fail (by 400,000 dwellings) to meet its target of constructing 1.2 million new homes by 2029.

    Prefab building methods make up just 8% of new housing developments in Australia.

    Some countries use it much more: Sweden boasts more than 100 years of prefab construction experience, where more than 80% of homes are produced in factories and then assembled at their destinations.

    Modular housing can be described as a promising step forward. But while they offer potential improvements in speed and cost efficiency, it cannot solve the massive housing deficit on its own without structural policy reforms in the near future.

    What about the Help to Buy scheme?

    Shared-equity loans tackle a different side of the problem: affordability for buyers.

    Experts describe Help to Buy as a “modest” but useful “piece of the puzzle” in solving the housing crisis.

    While its impact on general house prices and universal housing affordability is minimal, policymakers worry that programs like these unintentionally push up prices by boosting demand.

    Federal v state roles

    Housing policy in Australia is a shared responsibility.

    State governments control planning, zoning and most of the levers that determine how quickly homes can be approved and built (such as releasing land for development or approving apartment projects).

    The federal government mainly controls funding and high-level programs, so the success of the Albanese government’s plan will depend a lot on cooperation with the states and territories.

    However, there’s some inherent tension here: Canberra can set targets and provide incentives (funding), but it can’t directly build houses or force local councils to approve projects faster.

    That’s one reason behind the prefab certification idea: it removes one potential regulatory hurdle at a national level.

    Political timing

    The timing of this housing plan announcement is no coincidence.

    Australia will have a federal election by May 2025. Most voters will likely consider housing costs and cost-of-living to be primary issues.

    The expansion of Help to Buy enables Labor to target first-home buyers, which may be important in the election.

    The new housing plan is ambitious in scope and certainly a welcome effort to turn the tide on housing affordability.

    However, renters and prospective buyers are unlikely to experience quick benefits from these housing initiatives, as it will require sustained action and cooperation well beyond the upcoming election cycle.

    The Help to Buy program will begin later in 2025, and the positive effects of investing in prefabricated/modular housing will require a period of time before they become apparent.

    It is unclear whether these measures will effectively persuade voters and produce substantial improvements.

    Dr. Ehsan Noroozinejad has received funding from both national and international organisations to support research addressing housing and climate crises. His most recent funding on integrated housing and climate policy comes from the James Martin Institute for Public Policy.

    ref. A $33 billion vote-grabber or real relief? Examining the Albanese government’s big housing pledge – https://theconversation.com/a-33-billion-vote-grabber-or-real-relief-examining-the-albanese-governments-big-housing-pledge-252915

    MIL OSI AnalysisEveningReport.nz

  • MIL-OSI: Novacrest Introduces Structured, Risk-Managed Real Estate Investment Fund for Passive Investors

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Kissimmee, FL, March 25, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Novacrest, a diversified real estate investment firm, has announced the launch of its structured real estate investment fund, designed to provide secure, high-yield passive income opportunities. This fund offers accredited investors a simplified way to benefit from real estate without direct involvement in property management, leveraging a risk-managed approach across various investment vehicles.
    With increasing demand for alternative investments, Novacrest’s model offers a compelling option for those seeking consistent returns while minimizing traditional real estate investment complexities. By diversifying capital into fix-and-flip properties, structured real estate notes, and development projects, the fund optimizes growth and wealth preservation.

    A Smarter Approach to Passive Real Estate Investing

    Traditional real estate investment often requires hands-on management, market expertise, and significant time commitments. Novacrest’s structured investment model removes these barriers, allowing investors to participate in high-performing real estate markets without active involvement.
    Key advantages of Novacrest’s real estate investment fund include:

    • Diverse Investment Vehicles – Capital is allocated across fix-and-flip projects, land development, and structured real estate notes, balancing risk and reward.
    • Risk-Managed Strategy – Investments are backed by data-driven market analysis, ensuring capital is deployed in high-performing real estate markets.
    • Tax-Advantaged Returns – Structured investments offer potential tax-free growth, making them attractive alternatives to traditional real estate income.
    • Complete Investor Transparency – Monthly performance reports, a secure investor dashboard, and clear insights into fund allocations.
    • 100% Passive Investment – Investors benefit from real estate appreciation and profits without dealing with tenants, property maintenance, or legal complexities.

    “We created Novacrest’s real estate investment fund to give investors a smarter, more secure way to build wealth through real estate,” said Kiani Kharfan, CEO of Novacrest. “By combining risk management with strategic asset allocation, we make real estate investing truly passive while delivering strong returns.”

    The Advantage of Florida’s Real Estate Market

    Florida remains one of the most lucrative real estate markets in the U.S., with house flipping and structured real estate investments generating high returns. Recent industry data highlights:

    • 28.7% average ROI on house flipping in Q2 2024, with an average gross profit of $70,250 per flip. (Source: Fool.com)
    • 141.5% ROI on flipped properties in Ocala, positioning Florida as a prime market for investment. (Source: Fool.com)
    • Strong profit margins in Orlando, Jacksonville, and Tampa, reinforcing the state’s reputation as a real estate investment hotspot.

    Novacrest leverages real-time market analytics to identify high-potential opportunities, ensuring optimal investment performance.

    Structured Investments vs. Traditional REITs

    Unlike publicly traded REITs, Novacrest’s private investment fund offers greater control, lower volatility, and direct exposure to real estate-backed assets. By structuring investments across multiple property types, the firm delivers higher, more predictable returns compared to market-dependent REITs.

    Why Investors Are Turning to Novacrest

    With a focus on wealth preservation and strategic growth, Novacrest has positioned itself as a leading alternative investment platform. Investors are drawn to:

    • Higher returns than traditional REITs
    • Asset-backed security
    • Predictable, structured income streams
    • Elimination of property management responsibilities
    • Access to exclusive real estate markets

    “Passive investors deserve a secure, high-yield investment vehicle that works for them,” added Kharfan. “We built Novacrest to be that solution—delivering structured real estate growth without the hassle of direct ownership.”

    How to Get Started

    Novacrest’s real estate investment fund is exclusively available to accredited investors seeking to diversify their portfolios with risk-managed real estate assets. To learn more, visit: Novacrest.

    About Novacrest

    Novacrest is a multi-industry investment firm specializing in real estate development, flipping, structured real estate investments, carbon credits, data centers, and capital raising. The company offers alternative investment opportunities tailored for accredited investors seeking secure, high-yield wealth-building strategies.

    Disclaimer: The expert opinions presented in this PR/Story are based on the extensive experience and knowledge of the source company. These views do not necessarily reflect the opinions of the news distribution company and its distribution partners. There is no offer to sell, no solicitation of an offer to buy, and no recommendation of any security or any other product or service in this article. Moreover, nothing contained in this should be construed as a recommendation to buy, sell, or hold any investment or security, or to engage in any investment strategy or transaction. It is your responsibility to determine whether any investment, investment strategy, security, or related transaction is appropriate for you based on your investment objectives, financial circumstances, and risk tolerance. Consult your business advisor, attorney, or tax advisor regarding your specific business, legal, or tax situation. The news distribution company and its distribution partners do not endorse or guarantee the accuracy, completeness, or reliability of the information shared by the guest. Viewers are encouraged to consult with their own experts or conduct their own research when making decisions related to topics of this nature. The source company is the one issuing this release. Please contact them directly for further information.

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Wrap Taps Former EXIM Bank Executive Stephen M. Renna to Spearhead International Growth and Financing Strategy

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    MIAMI, March 25, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Wrap Technologies (NASDAQ: WRAP) (“Wrap” or, the “Company”), a global leader in innovative public safety technologies and non-lethal tools, today announced the appointment of Stephen M. Renna as a Strategic Advisor to the Company. Mr. Renna brings more than 35 years of executive experience in both public and private sectors and will focus on international expansion, with an emphasis on Made-in-USA exports and financing strategies through U.S. government resources.

    A seasoned expert at the intersection of business and government, Mr. Renna served as Chief Banking Officer at the U.S. Export-Import Bank (EXIM), where he led the execution of trade financing solutions in support of U.S. exporters, managing a $50 billion portfolio and a $40 billion pipeline. At Wrap, he is expected to advise on leveraging programs, such as the EXIM Bank and the Department of Defense (“DoD”) Office of Strategic Capital, to expand Wrap’s international go-to-market strategy and enhance its international pipeline for services like the Company’s BolaWrap and Managed Safety and Response (MSR).

    “Steve’s appointment underscores our commitment to transforming how U.S. safety technologies are deployed worldwide,” said Jared Novick, President of Wrap. “We believe that his unmatched expertise in federal finance and international deal-making will not only increase our competitiveness globally—but also allow us to create a strategic advantage for U.S.-made public safety solutions.”

    “We have had strong international interest, with many potential purchases, in the final stages,” said Scot Cohen, Chief Executive Officer and Executive Chairman of Wrap. “We believe offering financial solutions will help deepen our value proposition in a way that also aligns with U.S. strategic interests.”

    Mr. Renna’s career includes leadership roles that positioned American companies to win global contracts against foreign state-backed competitors. As Head of The Advocacy Center at the U.S. Department of Commerce, he helped coordinate government support for U.S. firms bidding on international government contracts—facilitating wins on more than 200 projects totaling over $147 billion in value.

    Made in USA Products and Services

    The Company believes Mr. Renna’s insights will be instrumental in aligning Wrap’s mission with critical U.S. government initiatives, including the China and Transformational Exports Program (CTEP), which offers competitive financing for key strategic sectors—such as public safety, AI, and communications—to help counter growing Chinese influence in emerging markets.

    “We believe Wrap is uniquely positioned to advance American leadership in public safety innovation,” said Mr. Renna. “I am excited to help extend Wrap’s impact by unlocking financing tools that enable U.S. technologies to compete—and win—on the global stage.”

    Mr. Renna currently serves as Principal at Federal Agency Finance Advisors, LLC, where he advises companies on accessing financing from federal agencies including EXIM, DOE, and the DoD. He previously led the federal agency practice at Ankura’s Global Strategic Advisory Group and served as Chief Executive Officer of the Commercial Real Estate Finance Council.

    He holds a Juris Doctor degree from the Catholic University of America Columbus School of Law and a Bachelor of Arts degree with honors from Fairfield University.

    About Wrap Technologies, Inc.

    Wrap Technologies, Inc. (Nasdaq: WRAP) is a global leader in public safety solutions, bringing together cutting-edge technology with exceptional people to address the complex, modern day challenges facing public safety organizations.

    Wrap’s BolaWrap® solution is a safer way to gain compliance—without pain.

    This innovative, patented device deploys light, sound, and a Kevlar® tether to safely restrain individuals from a distance, giving officers critical time and space to manage non-compliant situations before resorting to higher-force options. The BolaWrap 150 does not shoot, strike, shock, or incapacitate—instead, it helps officers operate lower on the force continuum, reducing the risk of injury to both officers and subjects. Used by over 1,000 agencies across the U.S. and in 60 countries, BolaWrap® is backed by training certified by the International Association of Directors of Law Enforcement Standards and Training (IADLEST), reinforcing Wrap’s commitment to public safety through cutting-edge technology and expert training.

    Wrap Reality™ VR is a fully immersive training simulator to enhance decision-making under pressure.

    As a comprehensive public safety training platform, it provides first responders with realistic, interactive scenarios that reflect the evolving challenges of modern law enforcement. By offering a growing library of real-world situations, Wrap Reality™ equips officers with the skills and confidence to navigate high stakes encounters effectively, leading to safer outcomes for both responders and the communities they serve.

    Wrap Intrensic is an advanced body-worn camera and evidence management system built for efficiency.

    Designed for efficiency, security, and transparency to meet the rigorous demands of modern law enforcement, Intrensic seamlessly captures, stores, and manages digital evidence, ensuring integrity and full chain-of-custody compliance. With automated workflows, secure cloud storage, and intuitive case management tools, it streamlines operations, reduces administrative burden, and enhances courtroom credibility.

    Trademark Information Wrap, the Wrap logo, BolaWrap®, Wrap Reality™ and Wrap Training Academy are trademarks of Wrap Technologies, Inc., some of which are registered in the U.S. and abroad. All other trade names used herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders. Cautionary Note on Forward-Looking Statements – Safe Harbor Statement This release contains “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of the “safe harbor” provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Words such as “expect,” “anticipate,” “should”, “believe”, “target”, “project”, “goals”, “estimate”, “potential”, “predict”, “may”, “will”, “could”, “intend”, and variations of these terms or the negative of these terms and similar expressions are intended to identify these forward-looking statements. Moreover, forward-looking statements are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties, many of which involve factors or circumstances that are beyond the Company’s control. The Company’s actual results could differ materially from those stated or implied in forward-looking statements due to a number of factors, including but not limited to: the expected benefits of the acquisition of W1 Global, LLC, the Company’s ability to maintain compliance with the Nasdaq Capital Market’s listing standards; the Company’s ability to successfully implement training programs for the use of its products; the Company’s ability to manufacture and produce products for its customers; the Company’s ability to develop sales for its products; the market acceptance of existing and future products; the availability of funding to continue to finance operations; the complexity, expense and time associated with sales to law enforcement and government entities; the lengthy evaluation and sales cycle for the Company’s product solutions; product defects; litigation risks from alleged product-related injuries; risks of government regulations; the business impact of health crises or outbreaks of disease, such as epidemics or pandemics; the impact resulting from geopolitical conflicts and any resulting sanctions; the ability to obtain export licenses for counties outside of the United States; the ability to obtain patents and defend intellectual property against competitors; the impact of competitive products and solutions; and the Company’s ability to maintain and enhance its brand, as well as other risk factors mentioned in the Company’s most recent annual report on Form 10-K, subsequent quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, and other Securities and Exchange Commission filings. These forward-looking statements are made as of the date of this release and were based on current expectations, estimates, forecasts, and projections as well as the beliefs and assumptions of management. Except as required by law, the Company undertakes no duty or obligation to update any forward-looking statements contained in this release as a result of new information, future events or changes in its expectations.

    A photo accompanying this announcement is available at https://www.globenewswire.com/NewsRoom/AttachmentNg/67eef813-7ed2-4fff-8a52-90422bb56c55

    This press release was published by a CLEAR® Verified individual.

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Greens bid to help first time buyers by lifting limit on Council Tax for second and empty homes

    Source: Scottish Greens

    Homes are for living in, not for profiteering.

    The Scottish Government must urgently act to maintain vital renter protections that are set to expire this time next week, says Scottish Green MSP Maggie Chapman.

    In March 2024 the then Green Minister, Patrick Harvie, introduced a temporary rent adjudication system which followed a freeze on most in-tenancy rents. This potentially allows rent increases to be limited to no higher than 12% if a tenant applies to a rent officer for a decision.

    The Scottish Government had said the rent adjudication system would support the transition away from the rent cap and to the forthcoming system of Rent Control Areas, avoiding a ‘cliff edge’ for renters. It would also protect them from excessively large increases which could be experienced with a sudden move to open market rent levels.

    Ms Chapman said:

    “With living costs soaring, a lot of renters will be watching their bills stacking up and worrying about the future. Meanwhile, there will be rogue landlords all over Scotland eagerly waiting to cash-in from the minute that these protections are lifted.

    “Time and again the landlord lobby has shown that it can’t be trusted to look out for the best interest of renters, and I don’t want to see the communities I represent left at the mercy of a broken housing market.

    “Unless the Scottish Government acts now, households and families will be plunged into totally avoidable poverty. Do they really want to do that on top of all the cuts that Labour is implementing from Westminster?”

    Ms Chapman added:

    “The forthcoming Housing Bill could play an important role in transforming renters rights, but we need to ensure that we are protecting people here and now.

    “Homes are for living in and not for profiteering. It is time to redress the balance and ensure that everyone has a warm, comfortable and affordable place to call home.”

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI: Middlefield Canadian Income PCC – Annual Financial Report

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Middlefield Canadian Income PCC (the “Company”)

    Including Middlefield Canadian Income – GBP PC (the “Fund”), a cell of the Company

    Registered No:  93546

    Legal Entity Identifier: 2138007ENW3JEJXC8658

    ANNUAL FINANCIAL REPORT

    The Company hereby announces the publication of its full unedited annual financial report for the year ended 31 December 2024 (the “AFR”).

    In accordance with Listing Rule 6.4.1, a copy of the AFR has been submitted to the National Storage Mechanism and it will shortly be available for inspection at https://data.fca.org.uk/#/nsm/nationalstoragemechanism.

    The AFR is also available from the ‘Trust Documents’ section of the Company’s website: https://middlefield.com/funds/uk-funds/middlefield-canadian-income-trust/

    Enquiries:

    Secretary

    JTC Fund Solutions (Jersey) Limited

    Tel.: 01534 700000

    Dean Orrico

    President

    Middlefield International Limited

    Tel.: 01203 7094016

    END OF ANNOUNCEMENT

    Middlefield Canadian Income Trust

    Annual Report and Accounts

    For the year ended 31 December 2024

    LON: MCT

    Focusing on high levels of stable and increasing income together with capital growth, this Fund invests in high quality, Canadian large capitalisation businesses. Middlefield Limited, the Fund’s investment manager, is a private and independent firm located in Toronto, Canada, and is regulated by the Ontario Securities Commission.

    Financial Highlights

    2024 DIVIDENDS PAID

    5.3p per share

    1.325p per share quarterly

    5.5p per share New Dividend Guidance for 20251

    YIELD

    4.6%

    SHARE PRICE

    116.00p

    NAV PER SHARE

    134.05p

    NET ASSETS

    £142.7m

    1. This is a target only and does not constitute, nor should it be interpreted as, a profit forecast.

    Why Middlefield Canadian Income PCC?

    Who is this fund for?

    This Fund is for long-term investors seeking dividends and capital appreciation from a diversified portfolio of stable, profitable businesses domiciled primarily in Canada.

    Reasons to buy

    Unique

    The UK’s only listed Canadian equity fund focused on high income – admitted to the FTSE UK All-Share Index in 2011.

    Proven

    Outperformance over the period since inception in 2006. The Fund’s total return for 2024 was 20.6 per cent versus the benchmark total return of 7.6 per cent.

    Diversification

    UK investors are underexposed to Canadian equities – Canada is one of the largest investable economies in the developed world.

    High Income

    Canadian equities offer a higher yield compared to other developed markets. MCT has consistently paid dividends in excess of 5p per share per annum since 2017 and increased its dividend in 2023, 2024 and 2025.

    Stability

    Canada is a member of the G7 and offers one of the most stable political and financial systems in the world.

    Governance

    Experienced Board of Directors with an independent majority, re-elected annually by shareholders to protect their interests.

    A member of the Association of Investment Companies

    Further details about the Company, including the latest annual and half yearly financial reports, fact sheets and stock exchange announcements, are available on the website at www.middlefield.co.uk/mcit.htm

    Contents

    Strategic Report

    Key Information                                                                                                                                            4

    Historical Performance                                                                                                                                 5

    Chairman’s Statement                                                                                                                                  6

    Investment Manager’s Report                                                                                                                     11

    Top Holdings                                                                                                                                                13

    ESG Policy                                                                                                                                                   16

    Business Model                                                                                                                                            22

    Biographies                                                                                                                                                   26

    Corporate Information                                                                                                                                   29

    Report of the Directors                                                                                                                                  36

    Corporate Report

    Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities                                                                                                        40

    Directors’ Remuneration Report                                                                                                                    41

    Corporate Governance Statement                                                                                                                43

    Report of the Audit Committee                                                                                                                      48

    General Shareholder Information                                                                                                                  51

    General Data Key Investor Document and Related Data                                                                             52

    Independent Auditor’s Report on the Fund                                                                                                   53

    Financial Statements

    Statement of Financial Position of the Fund                                                                                                  60

    Statement of Comprehensive Income of the Fund                                                                                        61

    Statement of Changes in Redeemable Participating Preference Shareholders’ Equity of the Fund             62

    Statement of Cash Flows of the Fund                                                                                                           63

    Notes to the Financial Statements of the Fund                                                                                             64

    Independent Auditor’s Report on the Company                                                                                            81

    Statement of Financial Position of the Company                                                                                          84

    Notes to the Financial Statements of the Company                                                                                     85

    Definitions                                                                                                                                                     86

    Alternative Performance Measures                                                                                                               87

    Key Information

    This Fund invests in larger capitalisation Canadian and U.S. high yield equities with a focus on companies that pay and grow dividends.

    Exposure to Key Canadian Themes & Industries

    Canadian companies are amongst the world leaders across the real estate, financial and energy and power sectors.

    Real Estate

    Canada has had the highest population growth rate in the developed world. Immigration tailwinds and a highly educated workforce are expected to support ongoing demand for real estate in Canada. Middlefield is one of the top real estate investors in Canada with over 40 years of experience and $450M+ in AUM across real estate strategies.

    Financials

    One of the world’s most sophisticated and well-capitalised banking systems, Canada’s banks are well-positioned to consistently grow their dividends over time. Canadian financials have historically demonstrated less volatility than peers during periods of market uncertainty.

    Energy and Power

    North American energy is expected to play a vital role in energy security and the energy transition over the coming decades. Its domestic power market benefits from an abundance of renewable energy sources and robust demand for electricity driven by immigration, growing corporate demand, and improving global accessibility.

    Key Data as at 31 Dec 2024

    Historical Performance

    As at 31 December 2024

    Performance Since Inception to 31 December 2024

    As at 31 December 2024

    Notes:

    1.        Net asset value total returns (in Sterling, net of applicable withholding taxes, fees, and including the reinvestment of dividends).

    2.         The Fund’s benchmark, the S&P/TSX Composite High Dividend Index (“Benchmark”), has been currency adjusted to reflect the Canadian Dollar (“CAD”) returns from inception to October 2011 (while the Fund was CAD hedged) and Sterling (“GBP”) returns thereafter.

    3.        Prior to 31 October 2024, the Fund’s Benchmark as well as the S&P/TSX Composite Index, were calculated gross of withholding tax. Beginning 31 October 2024, the Benchmark and the S&P/TSX Composite Index are calculated net of a 15% withholding tax and all period returns have been restated on this basis.

    Recent Performance 1 Mth 3 Mth 6 Mth YTD 1 Year
    Share Price -10.8% 3.6% 15.3% 20.6% 20.6%
    NAV -4.2% 2.6% 12.9% 15.1% 15.1%
    Benchmark -4.7% 1.1% 7.7% 7.6% 7.6%
    S&P/TSX Composite -4.5% 4.2% 9.9% 13.5% 13.5%
    Long-Term Performance 3 Year

    annualised

    5 year

    annualised

    7 Year

    annualised

    10 year

    annualised

    Since Inception annualised1
    Share Price 4.3% 8.2% 7.2% 6.7% 6.8%
    NAV 3.3% 7.2% 6.8% 7.4% 7.2%
    Benchmark 5.2% 7.9% 6.9% 7.1% 6.1%
    S&P/TSX Composite 6.4% 9.8% 8.3% 8.4% 6.4%
    Long-Term Performance 3 Year cumulative 5 year cumulative 7 Year cumulative 10 year cumulative Since Inception cumulative1
    Share Price 13.5% 48.3% 62.8% 90.8% 239.0%
    NAV 10.2% 41.9% 58.1% 104.1% 262.7%
    Benchmark 16.4% 46.3% 59.2% 97.6% 199.1%
    S&P/TSX Composite 20.5% 59.3% 74.6% 124.4% 215.0%

    Sources: Middlefield, Bloomberg. As at 31 December 2024.

    Past performance is not a guide to the future. The price of investments and the income from them may fall as well as rise and investors may not get back the full amount invested. All price information is indicative only.

    Total returns including the reinvestment of dividends for all returns. Fund returns are net of fees.

    Composite of monthly total returns for the S&P/TSX Income Trust Index from inception to 31 December 2010 and the S&P/TSX Composite High Dividend Index (formerly named the S&P TSX Equity Income Index).

    Currency adjusted to reflect CAD$ returns from inception of MCT to Oct 2011 and GBP returns thereafter since MCT was CAD$ hedged from inception to Oct 2011

    Prior to 31 October 2024, the Fund’s Benchmark, as well as the S&P/TSX Composite Index, were calculated gross of withholding tax. Beginning 31 October 2024, the Benchmark and the S&P/TSX Composite Index are calculated net of a 15% withholding tax and all period returns have been restated on this basis.

    Chairman’s Statement

    Michael Phair

    Chairman

    It is my pleasure to introduce the 2024 Annual Financial Report for Middlefield Canadian Income PCC (“MCT” or the “Company”) and its closed-ended cell known as Middlefield Canadian Income – GBP PC (the “Fund”). The Fund invests primarily in dividend-paying Canadian equities, with the objective of providing shareholders with a high level of dividend as well as capital growth over the longer term.

    Investment Performance

    The Fund delivered very good relative performance in 2024. MCT generated total returns of 20.6 per cent on its share price and 15.1 per cent on net assets, both of which were higher than the benchmark total return of 7.6 per cent. Financials, Energy, and Utilities were all positive contributors primarily due to sector allocation and stock selection gains. The Investment Manager believes that 2024 represented the early stages of a sustained outperformance following a period of challenging market conditions for the Fund’s core sectors. In January 2025, the Fund’s dividend was increased from 5.3p to 5.5p per share per annum.

    Over 2024, the discount to net asset value at which the Fund’s shares traded narrowed from -16.8 per cent at the start of the year to -13.5 per cent at the end. The discount moved to within -6 per cent at the beginning of December 2024 which coincided with the share price increasing to 131.25p, a high point for the year. This increase reflected the buying activity by Saba Capital Management L.P. (“Saba”) which first announced a notifiable holding in the Fund’s shares in April 2024, and which has announced further increases in its holding since such date. Saba’s current total interest in the Fund’s shares (comprising its direct and indirect exposure) is estimated to be 29 per cent. Recent developments regarding Saba are discussed below under “Engagement with Saba”.

    Investment Management

    The Board has regular contact with the Investment Manager, Middlefield Limited, to discuss portfolio strategy and review its investment approach, gearing and sector allocations. We remain satisfied that the Investment Manager is applying the strategy consistently and professionally and are confident that the Investment Manager’s outlook and the Fund’s corresponding positioning are capable of delivering good performance over time.

    Middlefield Limited, the Fund’s Investment Manager, has 45 years of investing experience. The Investment Manager uses an actively managed strategy, allowing it to take advantage of market dislocations across Canada and the U.S. In 2024, Canada was ahead of other developed countries in reducing their policy rates after sustained downward trends in inflation. Meanwhile, the U.S. Federal Reserve’s monetary policy remained restrictive for longer. In light of the high levels of cash flow and dividends that Canadian equities offer, and the valuation discounts at which they trade relative to U.S. companies, the Board remains supportive of the Investment Manager’s decision to be substantially invested in Canadian equities. In Q4 2024, against the backdrop of an improving outlook for the Canadian economy as well as a peaking of 10-year government bond yields in the U.S. and Canada, the Fund increased its exposure in Canadian energy from c. 19 per cent to c. 22 per cent which remains above the benchmark, while Real Estate remains the most overweight sector in the Fund relative to the benchmark.

    Shareholder Engagement

    Increasing investor interest in the Fund remains one of the Board’s highest priorities. The Board continues to promote the Company through the Investment Manager’s investor relations initiative, which is dedicated to keeping our shareholders well-informed, especially in times of market turmoil. The Investment Manager provides regular updates through commentaries and articles to get their perspectives directly. This content is accessible on the Investment Manager’s website, where it generates regular insights into the portfolio’s outlook and the decision-making process: Middlefield Canadian Income Trust Content. In addition, the Trust remains engaged with Kepler Partners. Kepler Partners continues to introduce the Investment Manager to new investors throughout London and its surrounding regions, while consistently producing research aimed at raising the profile of the Fund. Kepler Partner’ coverage of the Fund can be accessed at: Middlefield Canadian Income Research. The Board also works with Buchanan, a public relations firm tasked with enhancing the Fund’s reputation among retail investors. The Fund’s ongoing press engagements are featured on our website under “Featured Press”. Alternatively, prospective investors can subscribe to email updates on the Fund’s website to be updated regularly: Middlefield Canadian Income Trust | Middlefield Group.

    Fund Sector Weights Compared to Benchmark as at 31 December 2024

    Sector Allocation MCT Benchmark Over/Underweight
    Financials 27.3% 30.0% -2.7%
    Energy 22.4% 15.0% 7.4%
    Real Estate 18.5% 4.4% 14.1%
    Pipelines 16.9% 15.8% 1.1%
    Utilities 9.5% 13.8% -4.3%
    Materials 2.8% 5.4% -2.6%
    Communication Services 2.6% 10.4% -7.8%
    Consumer Discretionary 0.0% 3.0% -3.0%
    Industrials 0.0% 0.8% -0.8%
    Consumer Staples 0.0% 0.8% -0.8%
    Health Care 0.0% 0.7% -0.7%
    Information Technology 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
    Total 100.0% 100.0%  

    Source: Middlefield, Bloomberg

    The background to the Fund’s performance is explained in depth by Mr Dean Orrico in the Investment Manager’s accompanying report.

    Engagement with Saba

    Since the Fund’s year end, on 10 February 2025 the Fund, together with three other UK-listed closed-end funds, received a requisition notice from Saba, marking the second phase of Saba’s recent activist campaign in the UK-listed closed-end fund sector. The first phase commenced on 18 December 2024 with Saba requisitioning general meetings at seven UK-listed closed-end funds, proposing resolutions (each of which later failed) to remove the current independent directors of those seven funds and replace them with Saba’s own appointees, with a view to also terminating the management contracts and, in due course, replacing the investment managers with Saba.

    The requisition notice received by the Fund on 10 February 2025 was for the approval by shareholders of the taking of all necessary steps to implement a scheme or process by which shareholders would become (or have the option to become) shareholders of a UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle) implementing a substantially similar strategy to the Fund. Such scheme or process could entail shareholders rolling into an existing or newly established UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle), in either case managed by the Fund’s existing investment manager or one of its affiliates.

    Following consultation with a number of the Fund’s largest shareholders including Saba, and following constructive discussions with Saba, on 21 February 2025 the Fund announced that Saba had agreed to withdraw its requisition notice for a period of 60 days to enable the Fund and its advisers to formulate proposals that are in the best interests of all shareholders.

    At the current time, the Board is in the process of considering a number of strategic options in the best interests of shareholders as a whole. A further announcement regarding future proposals which the Fund may put to shareholders will be made in due course.

    Gearing

    The Fund reports its gearing relative to net and total assets in its monthly fact sheet. Gearing relative to total assets was consistent throughout 2024. This compares to the Fund’s upper gearing limit of 25 per cent. of its total assets at the time of drawdown. Net gearing, which represents borrowings as a percentage of net assets, is the AIC standard measure of gearing. Net gearing at the start of the year was 17.2 per cent and ended the period on 31 December 2024 at 19.3 per cent.

    The cost of borrowing has come down in 2024 due to the Bank of Canada cutting rates by a total of 175 basis points throughout the year. We anticipate further declines in borrowing costs as the BoC is expected to continue its easing cycle in 2025. The Board continues to believe the use of gearing is warranted at prevailing interest rates due to an expected total return that exceeds total borrowing costs. The Board will continue to weigh the benefits of gearing against the costs and monitor the spread between interest expenses and the yield of the portfolio to ensure the use of leverage remains in the best interest of shareholders. On 3 April 2024, the credit facility was amended to replace Banker’s Acceptances with CORRA (Canadian Overnight Repo Rate Average administered and published by the Bank of Canada) loans.

    Earnings and Dividends

    In light of the excess revenue earnings generated by the Fund this year, together with the prospect of dividend growth from the underlying portfolio, the Board approved a 0.2p increase to the annual dividend target in early 2025 to 5.5p for 2025. This is a target only and should not constitute, nor should it be interpreted as a profit forecast.

    Quarterly interim dividends each of 1.325p per share were paid on 31 January 2024, 30 April 2024, 31 July 2024 and 31 October 2024 representing a 1.92 per cent. increase to quarterly payments made in 2023.

    Consistent dividend growth is a core consideration for the Fund’s security selection process and factored into the Board’s decision to increase the dividend. The Company’s revenue earnings per share totalled 5.61p for the current year, reflecting a dividend coverage ratio of 1.06. This compares to dividend coverage ratios of 1.07 in 2023 and 1.16 in 2022. The Board regularly reviews the Fund’s dividend coverage and, subject to market conditions as well as the Fund’s earnings, it will continue to consider whether further dividend increases are warranted in the future.

    Directors’ Remuneration

    For 2024, the directors’ remuneration remained at £36,000 per annum for the chairman of the Board, £32,000 per annum for the chairman of the audit committee and £29,000 per annum for all other directors bar Mr Orrico, who has waived his entitlement for remuneration for acting as a director. The last increase was on 1 July 2023.

    Related Party Transactions

    The Company’s related parties are its directors and the Investment Manager. There were no related party transactions (as defined in the Listing Rules) during the year under review, nor up to the date of this report. Details of the remuneration paid to the directors and the Investment Manager during the year under review are shown in note 13.

    Material Events

    Save for the Saba requisition and the Board’s ongoing consideration of future strategic options for the Company following engagement with Saba as referred to above, the Board is not aware of any significant event or transaction which has occurred between 1 January 2025 and the date of publication of this statement which could have a material impact on the financial position of the Fund.

    Company and Fund Annual General Meetings

    At each of the Company and Fund Annual General Meetings held on 13 June 2024, all resolutions, relating to both ordinary business and special business were duly passed.

    Board Composition and Succession Planning

    The Board frequently reviews its succession planning strategy and has taken multiple steps in recent years to refresh its composition. We are pleased with the significant progress made to ensure the highest standards of good corporate governance. These steps include the appointment of four new nonexecutive directors over the past five years: Mr Michael Phair (on 13 June 2019), Ms Kate Anderson (on 12 April 2021), Ms Janine Fraser (on 13 September 2022) and Mr Andrew Zychowski (on 30 June 2023).

    The Board currently comprises five nonexecutive directors, of whom four are independent and 40 per cent are female, including the senior independent director.

    Contact

    Shareholders can write to the Company at its registered office or by email to the Secretary at middlefield.cosec@ JTCGroup.com.

    Principal Risks and Uncertainties

    Trade policy uncertainty will remain a persistent overhang in the coming months, affecting business confidence, capital investment, and supply chain planning across North America. With the looming USMCA renegotiation deadline and ongoing discussions around tariffs, businesses face heightened risks when making strategic decisions. Companies reliant on cross-border trade may hesitate to expand operations, allocate capital, or engage in M&A, given the potential for new trade barriers and shifting regulatory frameworks. This uncertainty could lead to reduced investment and prolonged supply chain inefficiencies, ultimately weighing on economic growth and corporate earnings.

    Additionally, although discussions to date between the Board and Saba have been constructive, uncertainty remains over how the Company will proceed going forwards. The Board remains mindful of the need to act at all times in the best interests of shareholders as a whole and wishes to avoid future engagement in costly and time-consuming activist shareholder campaigns.

    Despite inflation moderating in 2024, the risk of an upside surprise in inflation remains a key concern. Stickier inflation could erode consumer purchasing power and increase the cost of borrowing, stifling economic activity. Persistently high inflation could delay further rate cuts from central banks, which could exacerbate financial stress, leading to higher delinquency rates and weaker household consumption.

    The combination of expanding fiscal policies and easing monetary conditions could further strain government balance sheets in 2025. Canada and the US continue to run large fiscal deficits, with rising debt levels fuelling concerns about long-term sustainability. Increased government borrowing costs, especially in a higher-for-longer rate environment, could lead to investors demanding higher risk premiums and increased volatility in bond markets and sovereign credit ratings.

    Geopolitical concerns in 2024 centred on the wars in Ukraine and the Middle East, trade policy between the US and its trading partners, and a change in leadership in Canada and U.S. Although there are efforts to reach a ceasefire in both Ukraine and Israel, these conflicts all have the potential to disrupt global trade routes, commodity prices, and investor sentiment. The risk of further escalation could lead to supply shocks in energy markets, driving up commodity prices and putting renewed pressure on inflation. In addition, strained US-China relations – particularly over trade, technology and Taiwan – could introduce market volatility, affecting global supply chains and investment flows.

    Managing Risks

    The Board places significant emphasis on the Company’s risk assessment and the management of substantial risks. The Board prioritises this aspect, guided by its evaluation of the risks inherent in the Company’s operations. It oversees the controls implemented by the Board, the Investment Manager and other service providers. These evaluations and oversight activities are documented in the Company’s business risk matrix assessment, which remains an effective instrument for identifying and tracking primary risks.

    The directors consider the principal risks of the Company to be those risks, or a combination thereof, that may materially threaten the Company’s ability to meet its investment objectives, its solvency, liquidity or viability. In assessing the principal risks, the directors consider the Company’s exposure to and likelihood of factors that they believe would result in significant erosion of value, such as the possibility of a recession, the ability of Canada to diversify its economy away from natural resources, ongoing geopolitical tensions, the impact of climate change risk on investee companies, foreign exchange rates and the impact of higher interest rates on the Company and investor sentiment.

    At the time of this report, trade policy uncertainty, interest rates, and geopolitical tensions continue to have an impact on markets at both macro and micro levels. Growing geopolitical tensions can increase the risk of supply chain shocks and spikes in commodity prices. While the long-term severity and the impact on the Company’s principal risks and viability cannot currently be predicted with any accuracy, it is expected that a prolonged war in the Middle East would have detrimental effects on market sentiment, which could affect the Company’s asset values.

    Outlook

    Canada is well-positioned for economic resilience and market outperformance, supported by a lower rate environment, strong corporate fundamentals, and favourable structural tailwinds across key sectors. 2024 served as a strong base for the Fund’s core sector exposures, and we expect to build on that momentum. Canadian equities continue to offer attractive valuations, robust earnings growth, and compelling risk-adjusted returns relative to global peers. MCT remains strategically positioned to capitalise on these trends, with its core exposure in financials, real estate, energy, pipelines, and utilities – sectors that are well insulated from external trade policy uncertainty and provide strong income generation, stability, and long-term growth potential. The Fund does not hold significant exposure to industries most vulnerable to tariffs, such as manufacturing, autos, and materials, reducing its reliance on unpredictable trade negotiations.

    Despite having similar expected earnings growth over the next two years, Canadian equities continue to trade at steep valuation discounts to US stocks. With a circa 4.5 per cent dividend yield, the Fund also provides a stable and growing stream of income to investors in the form of quarterly distributions. We believe the current valuation discount embedded in Canadian equities offers a compelling entry point into high-quality Canadian companies. We continue to advocate that UK investors seeking North American equity exposure should allocate capital to Canada.

    We look forward to an ongoing dialogue with shareholders in order to inform our decision making process going forward and to enable us to continue to act in the best interests of all shareholders.

    Michael Phair

    Chairman

    24 March 2025

    Middlefield Group is a private and independent asset manager focused on equity income investment strategies. Located in Toronto, Canada, the company oversees a suite of funds, many of which have been recognised for excellence in various investment categories. Middlefield specialises in managing diversified equity income strategies for UK and Canadian investors with a particular focus on delivering stable distributions and capital appreciation over the long term.

    Investment Manager’s Report

    Dean Orrico

    2024 was an exceptional year for MCT unitholders, as we look to build on the momentum for continued growth into 2025. Despite both the TSX Composite and S&P 500 closing near all-time highs, many areas of the market, such as dividend payers and small-caps, did not meaningfully participate in the 2024 market rally. Technology and communication services stocks led to the upside while cyclical and value sectors lagged. In British Pounds, shares in the Fund generated a total return of 20.6 per cent and a NAV total return of 15.1 per cent. In local currency, the S&P 500, NASDAQ Composite, and the TSX Composite returned 25 per cent, 30 per cent and 22 per cent, respectively. The TSX lagged the S&P 500 by 3 per cent in 2024, due to its lower exposure to technology stocks and greater weighting to cyclical and value sectors. The Fund’s benchmark is more concentrated in higher-yielding dividend stocks and returned 9.6 per cent, lagging the TSX by nearly 12 per cent. Price-to-earnings multiples remain depressed for the TSX, resulting in a 4x multiple discount relative to the S&P 500.

    We are encouraged by several trends that emerged in mid-2024. Firstly, the Bank of Canada (BoC) began its first rate-cutting cycle in 4 years through a series of rate cuts totalling 175 basis points. Meanwhile, 10-year bond yields fell by more than 100 basis points from their 2023 highs as inflation concerns abated. Second, market breadth improved as companies and sectors that lagged throughout 2023 and H1’2024 benefitted from a relief rally. We believe this market broadening could represent the early stages of a prolonged recovery in dividend-paying stocks that should continue throughout 2025.

    In British Pounds, the Fund’s net asset value generated a total return of 15.1 per cent. Stock selection within the energy sector was the biggest contributor to performance in 2024 following a difficult 2023 period, with Enbridge and TC Energy among the Top 5 biggest contributors to performance. Utilities were the next biggest contributor, with Capital Power generating a total return of 77.9 per cent due to its strategy to supply power for upcoming AI data centres in Canada. Capital Power remains a large overweight position relative to the benchmark and has been a consistent Top 10 holding in the Fund.

    President Trump’s second term has introduced significant trade policy uncertainty. Despite all the trade noise, Canada’s economy remains on sound footing and is compelling for investors seeking attractive valuations and higher levels of income. While the scale and scope of potential US tariffs remain unpredictable, the Fund is well-positioned due to its diversification across resilient, high-quality sectors. With a focus on Canadian financials, pipelines, and REITs, the Fund is largely insulated from more tariff-targeted manufacturing industries, such as steel, aluminium, autos, and lumber. Similar to President Trump’s first term, we believe rational economic interests will prevail and the USMCA trade agreement will ultimately be renegotiated with minimal impact on Canadian equities. The U.S. represents over 75 per cent of Canadian exports and is an extremely important end-market for these sectors. US, Canada, and Mexico share over $1.5 trillion in annual trade, supporting 17+ million jobs across the three economies. This trilateral trade flow is one of the largest in the world, underscoring the significance of the USMCA agreement in maintaining economic stability in North America. Given this deep integration, renegotiations will likely aim to preserve trade stability rather than disrupt it.

    The Canadian federal election which has been called for 28 April 2025, will be a key event to watch with potential positive implications for economic policy, trade, and capital markets. A Canada-first mentality is gaining traction, emphasizing deregulation, pro-business policies, and strengthening domestic industries. A more conservative, business-friendly government could lead to increased investment in key sectors such as energy infrastructure, along with streamlined regulatory processes to encourage economic growth. In addition, diversifying trade partnerships beyond the US could present significant opportunities for Canadian pipeline and energy companies. These developments could also lead to increased foreign investment in Canada, strengthening the Canadian dollar. However, trade policy negotiations will bring uncertainty in the markets, particularly if US protectionist policies weigh on exports.

    Our base assumption remains that Canadian inflation will continue trending lower throughout 2025, supported by slowing immigration, easing supply chain pressures, and a more accommodative monetary policy stance from central banks. Over the past year, both the BoC and the Fed have seen meaningful progress in reducing inflation which has prompted rate cuts. However, deregulation, increased fiscal spending, and tax relief in the US could reintroduce inflationary pressures by stimulating aggregate demand, business investment, and consumer spending. While these policies are beneficial for long-term growth, they could delay or slow the pace of rate cuts if inflation proves to be stickier than expected. The balance between continued disinflation and the potential for reaccelerating inflation will be a key theme for policymakers in the year ahead.

    We remain constructive on the Canadian real estate sector in 2025. Although there was a strong rally in REIT unit prices during Q3, we saw a reversal after 10-year yields began climbing again. Investor sentiment for the broader real estate sector is inflecting and we are now seeing foreign buyers of Canadian REITs after a prolonged disconnect between fundamentals and valuations. With bond yields declining and central banks cutting rates further, we believe certain REITs are extremely well-positioned to outperform. Canadian REITs continue trading at an approximate 25 per cent discount to NAV.

    We expect quality REITs that generate stable and growing cash flows to narrow this discount throughout 2025. For these reasons, real estate remains the Fund’s largest active sector weight relative to the Benchmark. The Fund’s core real estate exposure areas include necessity-based retail, apartments, industrial, and seniors housing.

    Energy was among the Fund’s biggest contributors to performance in 2024 and remains a high-conviction investment theme for 2025. Energy represents 22 per cent of the portfolio, which outweighs the benchmark by 7.4 per cent. As geopolitical tensions mount, energy security has become a paramount issue for many countries. Canada’s oil and natural gas reserves rank in the top five globally, positioning the Canadian energy sector for consistent growth for decades. The recently completed Trans Mountain Expansion project will help unlock this growth potential by increasing capacity for crude oil transportation by an additional 590,000 barrels per day. In addition, LNG Canada, the largest private infrastructure project in Canada’s history, will become operational later this year. With an export capacity of 1.8 Bcf/d, LNG Canada will provide Canadian gas producers with a material boost to production egress. These large infrastructure projects are expected to stimulate significant investments from energy producers as well as midstream companies that will need to add necessary processing and handling capabilities.

    Financials represented 28 per cent of the Fund and remained the largest sector exposure in 2024. The decision stemmed from our growing confidence in the economic landscape both in Canada and the U.S, increasing corporate and investor sentiment as well as a pickup in capital markets activity. As the Bank of Canada began cutting rates mid-2024, Canadian banks rallied in Q3 after posting solid earnings results and improved sentiment. The banks remain well capitalised above regulatory minimums and are now strategically deploying capital to support organic growth. Credit concerns have been abating as we are past the peak in provisions for credit losses. The banks have prudently been building their capital reserves to ensure they remain well-equipped in the event of widespread credit defaults. With bond yields having fallen approximately 80 basis points from their April 2024 peak, and strengthening underwriting standards, we have become less concerned by this risk but continue to monitor credit quality closely. The Fund has been diversifying its exposure to financials by adding insurance companies and asset managers to the portfolio. These positions will expose the Fund to different revenue streams and geographies. Our highest weighted names remain Bank of Montreal, Royal Bank of Canada, and CIBC, all of which have well-capitalised balance sheets and fully covered dividends.

    The Fund had 9.5 per cent of the portfolio allocated to utilities at the end of 2024, below the Benchmark weight of 13.8 per cent. This underweight positioning was additive to performance. Despite its traditionally defensive characteristics, the sector lagged the TSX last year by 9.6 percentage points, with a total return of 8.6 per cent (local currency). Independent power producers did most of the heavy lifting, while regulated utilities and renewables significantly lagged. We expect the rest of the sector to re-rate over time as interest rates decline. The surging demand for electricity to power new data centres is a positive trend and we remain bullish on the sector’s long-term growth prospects. Our preferred picks in the sector include AltaGas, Capital Power, and Brookfield Renewables.

    Top Holdings

    Top Holdings as at 31 December 2024

    Company Sector % of Equities
    Tourmaline Oil

    Tourmaline is Canada’s largest natural gas producer and one of North America’s top suppliers of low-cost energy. The company operates high quality assets in the Montney and Deep Basin formations, leveraging its scale and strong balance sheet to maintain industry leadership. Tourmaline has also built a solid track record of dividend growth while paying out frequent special dividends over the last few years driven by their strong cash flow generation and commitment to growing shareholder returns.

    Energy 4.8%
    Enbridge Inc.

    Enbridge is one of the largest energy infrastructure companies in North America with an extensive delivery network of crude oil, natural gas, natural gas liquids and renewable energy. The company also provides gas utility services in Ontario, Quebec, and New Brunswick. It is actively investing in low carbon technologies such as solar, wind and hydroelectric power generation facilities. Enbridge’s goal is to achieve net-zero emissions by 2050 and reduce its greenhouse gas emissions by 30% by 2025.

    Pipelines 4.7%
    Bank of Montreal

    Bank of Montreal, which was founded in 1817, has grown to be Canada’s fourth largest bank. For over two centuries, BMO has maintained a consistent record of dividend payments. It has a well-established commercial banking business that it plans to grow through new product offerings and superior customer experience. BMO conducts its business in the US through its subsidiary, BMO Harris Bank which has over 500 branches.

    Financials 3.9%
    Canadian Natural Resource Ltd.

    Canadian Natural Resource is one of the largest independent producers of oil and natural gas in Canada. The company is focused on maximising shareholder value through a combination of organic growth initiatives, dividend payments and share buybacks. It has grown its dividend by approximately 23% per annum over the past 5 years and has never cut its dividend.

    Energy 3.8%
    Royal Bank of Canada

    Established in 1864, RBC stands as Canada’s largest bank by market capitalization. With a robust presence globally, RBC excels in providing diverse financial products and services through branches, ATMs, and cutting-edge online platforms. Renowned for its customer-centric approach, RBC’s strategic focus on the Capital Markets division enhances its standing, making the bank a key player in international finance.

    Financials 3.7%
    TC Energy

    TC Energy is a leading North American energy infrastructure company, operating natural gas, liquids pipelines, and power generation assets. It owns and operates over 93,300 km of natural gas pipelines across Canada, the U.S, and Mexico, supplying ~25% of North America’s natural gas demand. In addition, it operates power generation assets, including nuclear and renewable energy, contributing to a diversified portfolio. The company generates revenue through long-term take-or-pay contracted agreements which provide stable cash flows with minimal commodity price exposure.

    Pipelines 3.5%

    CIBC

    CIBC is one of Canada’s Big Six banks, providing a range of personal, business, and institutional banking services. The bank operates across four key segments, including Personal Banking, Commercial Banking & Wealth Management, as well as Capital Markets. The bank boasts a significant presence in Canada and U.S banking, with a growing U.S commercial lending business.

    Financials 3.4%
    AGF Management

    AGF Management is a global asset management firm, providing investment solutions across mutual funds, ETFs, and alternative investments. In recent years, it has expanded into private credit and alternatives, positioning itself for higher-margin growth. As funds flow out of savings accounts and back into equity markets post-rate cutting cycle, the active asset management industry will face meaningful tailwinds.

    Financials 3.4%
    Manulife Financial

    Founded in 1887, Manulife Financial is a leading insurance provider in Canada’s financial sector. Offering a comprehensive range of financial solutions, the company operates through a widespread network and digital platforms. With a focus on insurance, wealth management, and investments, Manulife’s commitment to innovation and customer satisfaction cements its prominent position in the global financial landscape.

    Financials 3.4%
    Pembina Pipelines Corp.

    Pembina is a well-established and reputable transportation and midstream service provider with over 65 years of operational history. Its assets are diversified across the hydrocarbon value chain, including pipelines, gathering & processing, and NGL midstream operations in Canada and the US. The company is actively investing in low-carbon and sustainability solutions such as carbon capture and storage to offset greenhouse gas emissions.

    Pipelines 3.1%

    Outlook

    Global markets face heightened uncertainty, driven by elevated geopolitical risks, shifting monetary policy, and trade tensions. Despite these challenges, Canada remains well-positioned for outperformance in 2025, underpinned by attractive valuations, strong fundamentals, and structural tailwinds in key sectors, including energy, real estate, and financials. The TSX Composite continues to trade at a 7 turns discount to the S&P 500, representing an attractive entry point for investors seeking dividend growth, capital discipline and resilient earnings.

    While trade policies remain unpredictable, the Fund is well-diversified across resilient, high-quality, service-based sectors that are less exposed to tariffs. Canada is benefitting from deregulation, a more pro-business environment, and a shift in fund flows towards value and cyclical sectors as markets continue to broaden. The AI-driven expansion will require vast energy infrastructure to support data centre growth, creating significant opportunities for pipeline and utility companies – sectors where the Fund has substantial exposure.

    Canadian corporations continue to prioritize shareholder returns, with record dividend payouts and share buybacks, a trend that is expected to persist. The Fund remains focused on high-quality companies with strong free cash flow generation and ability to grow their dividends. MCT’s portfolio emphasises high dividend paying stocks which have a long track record of consistently increasing dividends. Over the past five years, dividends received by the Fund on its portfolio have increased by 8.2 per cent per annum, exceeding the 7.5 per cent per annum growth rate for the Benchmark.

    Middlefield Limited

    Date 24 March 2025

    ESG

    Environment, Social and Governance (“ESG”) Policy and Stewardship Principles: ESG Policy

    As Investment Manager, Middlefield Limited (“Middlefield”) has a duty to maximise investment returns for the shareholders of the Fund without undue risk of loss. Middlefield does this within the investment limits of the Fund’s investment mandate. Although the Fund is not an ESG-focused or sustainable fund, Middlefield incorporates ESG considerations into its investment process to aid decision making, identify potential risks and opportunities and to enhance long-term, risk-adjusted returns. Stephen Erlichman, one of the foremost experts on governance in Canada, serves as Chair, ESG for Middlefield to augment its ESG capabilities and processes.

    It is Middlefield’s responsibility to employ a disciplined investment process that seeks to identify attractive investment opportunities and evaluate material risks that could impact portfolio returns. Middlefield believes that ESG factors have become an important component of a thorough investment analysis and that the integration of ESG factors will result in a more comprehensive understanding of a company’s strategy, culture and sustainability. Consistent with these objectives, Middlefield integrates ESG considerations into its investment process and these considerations are significant factors in selecting portfolio companies for its ESG-focused mandates. Our current ESG integration process includes the following:

    1.        Middlefield incorporates ESG scores and other ESG data in its multi-disciplined investment process to evaluate investments. Its methodology includes a qualitative review and assignment of ESG scores to individual holdings. Each company is analysed on an absolute basis and measured relative to its peers. The ESG scores and other ESG data are not the sole factors that govern its investment decisions, however, but rather constitute part of the information it reviews and considers alongside its fundamental, quantitative and qualitative research.

    2.        The ESG scoring framework considers the average ESG scores from several reputable third-party data providers. In addition, it cross-references potential investments with the constituents of relevant ESG indices to assess their eligibility in ESG-focused mandates. The data providers it has chosen to incorporate into its ESG analysis currently are Sustainalytics, S&P, Bloomberg and Refinitiv.

    3.        ESG considerations also are integrated into our investment process by, among other things:

    •        reviewing companies’ public disclosure, including annual reports, proxy circulars, and, if available, sustainability or ESG reports;

    conducting research and analysis on companies’ ESG policies and practices;

    obtaining third party research on companies;

    engaging with companies, including from time to time having discussions with management teams (both before purchasing shares for the portfolios and while our portfolios own such shares) on topics such as what initiatives and strategies have been put in place by the companies to deal with ESG considerations material to such companies; and

    monitoring shareholder meetings and voting proxies.

    Middlefield’s approach to ESG integration may evolve over time as more ESG and sustainability research and data become available.

    In addition to Middlefield’s integration of ESG considerations into its investment process Middlefield has adopted Stewardship Principles and activities which are complementary to its ESG integration process.

    Middlefield’s Stewardship Principles

    Middlefield, as a Canadian asset manager, understands it has the responsibility to be an effective steward of the assets it manages for its clients in order to enhance the value of those assets for the benefit of its clients. The Canadian Coalition for Good Governance (“CCGG”) has published a set of seven stewardship principles which have become recognised as Canada’s stewardship code for institutional asset owners and asset managers.

    Middlefield believes that CCGG’s stewardship principles should be tailored for asset managers depending on various factors, such as the size of the asset manager and the type of assets managed. Set out below are CCGG’s seven stewardship principles and a description of how Middlefield, as an independent Canadian asset manager whose predominant assets are public and private investment funds that invest in Canadian and international equities, carries out or intends to carry out such principles.

    Principle 1.

    Develop an approach to stewardship: Institutional investors should develop, implement and disclose their approach to stewardship and how they meet their stewardship responsibilities.

    Middlefield integrates stewardship into its investment process. Such integration includes:

    a procedure for voting proxies (see Principle 3);

    monitoring companies (see Principle 2);

    engaging with companies (see Principle 4);

    •        outsourcing stewardship activities (by, inter alia, utilising a proxy advisory firm to assist in monitoring companies and voting proxies);

    reporting to its clients (as required by law); and

    managing potential conflicts of interest (via Middlefield’s Independent Review Committee mandated by National Instrument 81-107, as well as Middlefield’s Code of Conduct).

    Principle 2.

    Monitor companies: Institutional investors should monitor the companies in which they invest.

    Middlefield monitors the companies in which it invests, including as follows:

    it reviews companies’ public disclosures, including annual reports and proxy circulars;

    it conducts research and analysis on companies;

    it obtains third party research on companies;

    it engages with companies (see Principle 4); and

    it monitors formal shareholder meetings and, if there is a particularly important matter and it believes it is practical and appropriate to do so, it attends formal shareholder meetings.

    Principle 3.

    Report on voting activities: Institutional investors should adopt and publicly disclose their proxy voting guidelines and how they exercise voting rights.

    Middlefield exercises voting rights attached to the securities held by the funds it manages as follows:

    •        Middlefield uses the following proxy voting guidelines:

    proxies will be voted in a manner that seeks to enhance the long-term sustainable value of the funds it manages; and

    proxies will be voted in a manner consistent with leading Canadian and international corporate governance practices.

    •        on routine matters, Middlefield generally supports management and the board unless there are unusual circumstances; and

    Middlefield uses the services of a proxy advisory firm to assist in voting proxies. Middlefield assesses the voting recommendations of the proxy advisory firm but Middlefield also monitors leading Canadian and international corporate governance practices. Middlefield does not automatically follow the recommendations of the proxy advisory firm, but in most cases, it votes as recommended. Middlefield retains ultimate responsibility for all proxy voting decisions.

    In addition, the public funds managed by Middlefield follow the proxy voting requirements of Part 10 of National Instrument 81-106 in regard to establishing policies and procedures for proxy voting and in regard to preparing and disclosing their proxy voting records.

    Principle 4.

    Engage with companies: Institutional investors should engage with portfolio companies.

    Middlefield engages with portfolio companies as follows:

    Middlefield engages with management of portfolio companies regularly, both before shares are purchased for the funds it manages and also while its funds own shares of the portfolio companies; and

    When Middlefield believes it is warranted, it may escalate engagement activities by engaging with directors, by voting against or withholding votes from directors or by voting against companies’ “say on pay” resolutions.

    Principle 5.

    Collaborate with other institutional investors: Institutional investors should collaborate with other institutional investors where appropriate.

    Middlefield collaborates with other institutional investors through investor associations to which Middlefield belongs.

    Principle 6.

    Work with policy makers: Institutional investors should engage with regulators and other policy makers where appropriate.

    Middlefield’s professional advisors, such as the law firms and accounting firms it retains, assist to keep it up to date on developments that are material to it as an asset manager. It utilises its professional advisors, and it also relies on the organisations to which it belongs, to engage on its behalf with regulators and policy makers where appropriate.

    Principle 7.

    Focus on long-term sustainable value: Institutional investors should focus on promoting the creation of long-term sustainable value.

    Middlefield focuses on a portfolio company’s long-term success and sustainable value creation, including as follows:

    Middlefield focuses on a company’s management and strategy, as well as its risks (both company specific and systemic); and

    Middlefield considers environmental, social and governance factors that are relevant to a company and integrates such factors into its investment activities.

    ESG Case Studies

    Canadian Imperial Bank (3.41% of the portfolio as at 31 December 2024)

    Summary:

    Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce (CIBC) is Canada’s 5th largest bank and serves retail, commercial, wealth management, and capital market clients. The company’s enterprise-wide regulatory program aims to enhance alignment with market practice and regulatory requirements. The company has received various accolades and recognition for its sustainability initiatives and commitment to sustainability.

    Highlights:

    •        Ranked #3 in North American Project Financial Renewables by IJ Global

    •        Built a leading renewables franchise focused on providing clients with expert guidance and access to the required capital

    •        CIBC Foundation continues to demonstrate purpose in action and supporting causes that are important to clients and communities

    Top ESG Issues:

    •        Strengthening cybersecurity and anti-money laundering standards remain a key issue for the financial services sector in North America

    •        Implementing the right policies and procedures to address current and emerging ESG priorities, including artificial intelligence, financed emissions, and sustainable finance

    ESG Ranking Relative to the Fund’s Benchmark:

    Sources: S&P, Sustainalytics, Bloomberg.

    Choice Properties REIT (2.22% of the portfolio as at 31 December 2024)

    Summary:

    Choice Properties REIT invests in necessity-based retail, commercial, industrial, mixed-use, and residential properties across Canada. The Choice Cares program aims to develop a strong culture of philanthropy, diversity, equity, and inclusion. Choice was also named one of Greater Toronto’s Top Employers (2023 and 2024) in recognition of their mentorship and benefit enhancement programs.

    Highlights:

    •        Achieved the first CAGBC Zero Carbon Building Design certification to be awarded to a retail property

    •        Maintained GRESB 4-star rating for second year (scored 82 on a 100-point scale), and continued to receive “low” Sustainalytics ESG risk rating

    •        Developed a Social Impact Framework that aligns with their core business and promotes local economic development and social cohesion at the neighbourhood level

    Top ESG Issues:

    •        Addressing affordability needs by developing mixed-use and community-driven projects

    •        Implementing green building standards as well as reducing energy and water consumption across its real estate portfolio

    ESG Ranking Relative to the Fund’s Benchmark:

    Sources: S&P, Sustainalytics, Bloomberg.

    Business Model

    The Company’s Status

    Middlefield Canadian Income – GBP PC is a protected cell of Middlefield Canadian Income PCC, a Jersey-incorporated protected cell company.

    The Fund is a closed-ended fund, whose shares have been admitted to the Official List of the FCA and to trading on the London Stock Exchange’s Main Market for listed securities. The Fund is regulated in Jersey by the Jersey Financial Services Commission (“JFSC”).

    JTC Fund Solutions (Jersey) Limited acts as the Company’s secretary and administrator. The Fund’s NAV is calculated using the bid prices of the securities held within its portfolio. The Company publishes the NAV of a share in the Fund on a daily basis.

    Investment Objective and Policy2

    The Fund seeks to provide shareholders with a high level of dividends as well as capital growth over the longer term. The Fund intends to pay dividends on a quarterly basis each year.

    Investment Portfolio

    The Fund seeks to achieve its investment objective by investing predominantly in the securities of companies and REITs domiciled in Canada and listed on a Canadian Stock Exchange that the Investment Manager believes will provide an attractive level of distributions, together with the prospect for capital growth. It is expected that the Fund’s portfolio will generally comprise between 35 and 70 investments.

    The Fund may also hold cash or cash equivalents.

    The Fund may utilise derivative instruments including index-linked notes, contracts for differences, covered options and other equity-related derivative instruments for the purposes of efficient portfolio management.

    The Fund will at all times invest and manage its assets in a manner which is consistent with the objective of spreading investment risk.

    Investment restrictions

    The Fund will not at the time of making an investment:

    have more than 10 per cent. of the value of its portfolio assets invested in the securities of any single issuer; or

    have more than 50 per cent. of the value of its portfolio assets comprised of its ten largest security investments by value; or

    have more than 40 per cent. of the value of its portfolio assets invested in securities listed on a recognised stock exchange outside Canada; or

    (d)        have more than 10 per cent. of the value of its portfolio assets invested in securities listed on a recognised stock exchange outside Canada and the United States; or

    (e)        have more than 10 per cent. of the value of its portfolio assets invested in unquoted securities; or

    (f)        purchase securities on margin or make short sales of securities or maintain short positions in excess of 10 per cent. of the Fund’s NAV.

    Hedging

    The Board reserves the right to employ currency hedging but, other than in exceptional circumstances, does not intend to hedge.

    Gearing

    The Fund has the power to borrow up to 25 per cent. of the value of its total assets at the time of drawdown. In the normal course of events, and subject to Board oversight, the Fund is expected to employ gearing in the range of 0 to 20 per cent. of the value of its total assets in order to enhance returns. Net gearing, which represents net borrowings as a percentage of net assets, is the AIC standard measure of gearing. At year end, the Fund’s net gearing was 19.3 per cent.

    Promoting the Company’s Success – Section 172 Statement

    The AIC Code requires that the Company should understand the views of the Company’s key stakeholders and describe in the annual report how their interests and the matters set out in section 172 of the UK’s Companies Act 2006 have been considered in Board discussions and decision-making.

    The Company has no employees and all of the directors are non-executive, so the Board considers that its key stakeholders are its shareholders, its service providers, society, the government, and regulators.

    The Board’s engagement with stakeholders is described in the section “Engagement with Stakeholders” below.

    The Board considers that the Company, as an externally-managed investment trust, with no employees, premises, nor manufacturing or other physical operations, therefore has no material, direct impact on the community and the environment. However, the Board considers social, community, environmental and human rights matters to be of significant importance and, in this respect, takes soundings from the Investment Manager as to how these matters are taken into consideration in respect of portfolio construction and its ongoing management. The Investment Manager is tasked with assessing how companies deal with and report on social and environmental risks and issues specific to the industry. It aims to incorporate ESG criteria into the Investment Manager’s processes when making stock selection decisions and promoting ESG disclosure.

    The Investment Manager is mindful of the impact which it can have upon shaping the consideration given to ESG matters by the Fund’s investee companies. In addition to considering ESG matters in portfolio construction decisions, the Investment Manager conducts ongoing investee company monitoring, and this engagement process may include voting and communication with management and company board members. Although the Company does not take a controlling stake in its investees, the Board also considers the interests of those stakeholders and oversees the activities of the Investment Manager, as explained in this Section 172 Statement. The Board ascribes to the highest standards of business conduct and has policies in place to ensure compliance with all applicable laws and regulations. In this respect, it also interacts with governmental organisations providing public services for society, and financial services regulators (such as the FCA and JFSC). In addition to monitoring the Company’s compliance with its own obligations, the Management Engagement Committee also monitors compliance by its service providers with their own obligations and; the work of the Management Engagement Committee during the year is explained in more detail later in this report on pages 46 and 47.

    The Company has an unlimited life and as described in detail in the Company’s viability statement, the Board considers the prospects of the Company for at least the next three years whenever it considers the Company’s long-term sustainability. All strategic decisions are therefore taken with the long-term success of the Company in mind and the Board takes external advice whenever it considers that such would be beneficial to its decision-making process, primarily from its retained service providers (including legal counsel), but also from other external consultants.

    The Board encourages openness and transparency and promotes proactive compliance with new regulations. The Company, through its Investment Manager and Administrator, files Jersey regulatory statistics on a quarterly basis and assists the Administrator in collecting data for provision to the JFSC to conduct a national risk assessment of money laundering and terrorist financing threats to Jersey.

    Engagement with Stakeholders

    As regards the Board’s engagement with shareholders, all shares in issue rank pari passu, all shareholders are treated equally. and no shareholder receives preferential treatment. When making decisions of relevance to shareholders, the Board considers first and foremost the likely consequences of its decisions in light of its duty to act in the best interests of the Company and shareholders as a whole.

    In addition to the regular reporting provided by key service providers, the Board’s primary formal engagement with its service providers is via the Management Engagement Committee, which issues questionnaires to all of its service providers and considers the detailed feedback received on an annual basis, reporting to the Board on its conclusions. The services provided by the key third-party service providers are critical to the ongoing operational performance of the Company. The Board believes that fostering constructive and collaborative relationships with the Company’s service providers will assist in their promotion of the success of the Company for the benefit of all shareholders.

    Management

    The Company is an Alternative Investment Fund (“AIF”) in accordance with the provisions of the AIFMD. For the purposes of the AIFMD, which was implemented into UK law with effect from 22 July 2013, the Company has been classified as a non-EU AIF managed by a non-EU AIFM. As such, the Company is not subject to the full scope of the AIFMD and therefore does not incur additional costs, such as those incurred in having to appoint a depositary, that would have been applicable had it been deemed to be managed by an EU AIFM.

    The Board is responsible for setting the Company’s Investment Objective and Investment Policy, subject to shareholders’ approval of any proposed material changes, and has a schedule of investment matters reserved for the directors’ resolution. The Board has contractually delegated to external agencies the management of the investment portfolio, the custodial services and the day-to-day accounting and secretarial requirements. Each of these contracts is only entered into after proper consideration by the Board of the quality of services being offered.

    The Board also receives and considers, together with representatives of the Investment Manager, reports in relation to the operational controls of the Investment Manager, Administrator, Custodian and Registrar. These reviews identified no issues of significance.

    The Board meets at least quarterly to review the overall business of the Company and to consider matters specifically reserved for its review. At these meetings, the Board monitors the investment performance of the Fund. The directors also review the Fund’s activities every quarter to ensure that it adheres to the Fund’s investment objective and policy or, if appropriate, to consider changes to that policy. Additional ad hoc reports are received as required and directors have access at all times to the advice and services of the Secretary, which is responsible for guiding the Board on procedures and applicable rules and regulations.

    Relationship with the Investment Manager and Performance

    The Company has no employees, premises, assets other than financial assets or operations. The Board engages reputable third-party suppliers with established track records to deliver day-to-day operations. The most important of these is the Investment Manager, which is responsible for the management of the Company’s assets in accordance with its investment objective and policy. The Board maintains a close working relationship with the Investment Manager and holds it to account for the smooth running of the Company’s day-to-day business. There is continuous engagement and dialogue between Board meetings, with communication channels remaining open and information, ideas and advice flowing freely between the Board and the Investment Manager.

    The Board retains responsibility for decisions over corporate strategy, corporate governance, risk and internal control assessment, determining the overall limits and restrictions of the portfolio and in respect of gearing and asset allocation, investment performance monitoring, dividend policy and setting marketing budgets.

    The Investment Manager and Investment Advisor promote the Company with the support of the Corporate Broker and the Board makes additional funds available to support marketing activities aimed at raising the profile of the Company among investors in the UK.

    As the Investment Manager holds the overall day-to-day relationship with the Company’s other third-party suppliers, the Board places reliance on the Investment Manager in this regard. The Board is confident that the Investment Manager has developed and maintains good working relationships with all of the Company’s third-party suppliers. To ensure the chosen service providers continue to deliver the expected level of service, the Board receives regular reports from them, evaluates the control environments in place at each service provider and formally assesses their appointment annually.

    By doing so, the Board seeks to ensure that the key service providers continue to be appropriately remunerated to deliver the level of service that it demands of them.

    The Company has appointed the Investment Manager as its AIFM. The Investment Manager is regulated by the Ontario Securities Commission. The Company has a formal schedule of the areas of decision making reserved for the Board and those over which the Investment Manager has discretion, and it is available for inspection on the Company’s website.

    A review of the Investment Manager’s performance is included in the Chairman’s Statement and the Investment Manager’s Report. The Board receives formal reports from the Investment Manager at each of its Board meetings, at which meetings representatives of the Investment Manager are present to answer the Board’s questions.

    Such reporting and the ensuing discussions cover all areas within the Investment Manager’s remit, including portfolio performance, portfolio risk, asset allocation and gearing, compliance with the Company’s investment objective and policy and investment restrictions and the outlook for the market and the Company’s prospects, as well as a comparison with the Company’s peer group provided by the Company’s corporate broker. In between meetings, the Investment Manager provides updates to the directors on any material events. The Investment Manager’s performance is assessed on an ongoing basis and includes the Fund’s performance relative to appropriate benchmarks and its peer groups.

    The Board and Investment Manager also discuss the marketing and investor relations work performed by the Investment Manager and Investment Advisor, which is an affiliate of the Investment Manager, in each quarterly Board meeting. The Investment Advisor and the Investment Manager are paid an additional fee for investor relations services totalling the lesser of 15 basis points of the market value of the Fund or £200,000 per annum, with the fee to be calculated daily based on the closing market value of the Fund and payable quarterly in arrears, and its performance is measured by reference to an agreed set of metrics.

    The Board has delegated voting on matters proposed to the Company by its investees and a report on the Investment Manager’s institutional voting policy for the Company is included in the Directors’ Report. The Board and the Investment Manager also consider social, community, environmental and human rights issues to be important and a report on the Investment Manager’s policies for the Company is also included in the Directors’ Report.

    As required by the Listing Rules and recommended by the AIC Code, the following additional information is provided:

    During the year under review and up to the date of this report, Middlefield Limited has acted as the Company’s discretionary investment manager. Middlefield International Limited (“the Investment Advisor”) provides investment advisory services to the Company and the Investment Manager. The Company pays an annual fee of 0.70 per cent. of NAV to the Investment Manager to cover its services and those provided to it by the Investment Advisor and the agreement can be terminated by either party on 90 days’ written notice. The Investment Manager and Investment Advisor are also paid an additional fee for investor relations services as previously mentioned and disclosed in note 2u.

    Having reviewed the investment management and advisory services provided by the Investment Manager and the Investment Advisor and having regard to the Fund’s investment performance since the Fund’s launch in May 2006, the directors are of the view that the portfolio should remain managed by the Investment Manager for the foreseeable future.

    Biographies

    As at 31 December 2024, the Board of Directors comprised five non-executive directors, four of whom were independent of the Investment Manager and its affiliates.

    Directors

    Michael Phair, Chair

    Mr. Phair has over 30 years’ investment banking experience at World Bank Group, Rothschild and UBS with a focus on privatisations, telecoms and media. He has lived and worked in Canada, Latin America, the United States, Europe and is a British citizen and resident in London since 1988. He is the Founder, former CEO and currently director of REG (UK) Ltd. which is a leading software solutions provider for counter-party risk management in the UK and global insurance market. He is the Chair of Children and Families Across Borders, a UK-based charity which is part of the International Social Services Network operating in over 130 countries worldwide. A successful private equity investor, Mr. Phair is the former Managing Member of Boston Capital Management (VP) LLC.

    Kate Anderson

    Ms Anderson, until 1st April 2025, is a managing partner of Voisin Law in Jersey. Ms Anderson intends to take up a new position in the legal profession in Jersey in due course. Her regulatory and funds practice specialises in the legal, regulatory and corporate governance aspects of investment funds, holding companies and managers. In recent years she has joined a number of working groups related to these areas, including the consultation group for the restatement of the Jersey Law of Contract, the working group tasked with updating the Limited Partnership (Jersey) Law to improve its functionality when used with funds and the Jersey Finance Community of Interest group on sustainable investment. Since 2008 Ms Anderson has sat on a number of collective investment fund and fund manager/ general partner boards.

    Janine Fraser

    Ms. Fraser, through her company, Harmony Business Partnering in Jersey, provides financial expertise and professional training. She is a member of the Institute of Directors and a Fellow of the Association of Chartered Certified Accountants. She also holds a Master’s Degree in E-Commerce from the University of Westminster.

    With over a decade of experience as a group financial controller at Triton Partners, an international investment firm, and extensive global experience in various sectors, including retail, merchant banking, travel, manufacturing, and oil, Ms. Fraser brings a wealth of industry knowledge to her role from her previous positions at RBS, Lloyds TSB, Hill Samuel, and British Airways.

    Dean Orrico

    Mr Orrico, President, Chief Executive Officer of Middlefield Limited and President of Middlefield International Limited, has been employed by the firm since 1996.

    Mr Orrico is currently responsible for overseeing the creation and ongoing management of all of Middlefield’s investment funds including mutual funds, Toronto and London Stock Exchange-listed funds and flow-through funds. He graduated with a Bachelor of Commerce degree from the Rotman School of Management (University of Toronto) and holds an MBA from the Schulich School of Business (York University). Mr Orrico is a registered Portfolio Manager.

    Mr Orrico has developed expertise in both equity and fixed income securities. Having spent many years managing equity portfolios and meeting with international companies and investors, Mr Orrico has overseen the diversification of Middlefield’s portfolios into global equity income securities.

    Andrew Zychowski

    Mr Zychowski has over 30 years’ investment banking experience, providing corporate advisory services to investment company boards. Until June 2019, he was the Head of the Investment Companies corporate department at Canaccord Genuity Limited. Prior to that he was the Head of the Investment Companies corporate department at Dresdner Kleinwort. Mr Zychowski is currently a non-executive director of The Ralph Veterinary Referral Centre Plc, a state of the art, multidisciplinary, small animal specialist referral veterinary hospital and Digital 9 Infrastructure plc which is traded on the London Stock Exchange and is in managed wind-down, with the objective to realise all existing assets in the company in an orderly manner. He is a qualified accountant and holds a BSc in Physics from Imperial College.

    Corporate Information

    Registered Office

    28 Esplanade

    St Helier

    Jersey JE2 3QA

    Directors

    Michael Phair (Chairman)

    Kate Anderson (SID)

    Janine Fraser

    Dean Orrico

    Andrew Zychowski

    Service Providers

    Administrator and Secretary

    JTC Fund Solutions (Jersey) Limited

    28 Esplanade

    St. Helier

    Jersey, JE2 3QA

    Investment Advisor

    Middlefield International Limited

    288 Bishopsgate

    London, EC2M 4QP

    Investment Manager

    Middlefield Limited

    Suite 3100

    8 Spadina Ave

    Toronto, Ontario

    Canada, M5V 0S8

    Legal Advisers

    In Jersey

    Carey Olsen Jersey LLP

    47 Esplanade

    St. Helier

    Jersey, JE1 0BD

    In Canada

    Fasken Martineau DuMoulin LLP

    Bay Adelaide Centre

    Box 20, Suite 2400

    333 Bay Street

    Toronto, Ontario

    Canada, M5H 2T6

    Broker and Corporate Advisor

    Investec Bank plc

    30 Gresham Street

    London, EC2V 7QP

    Custodian

    RBC Investor Services Trust

    155 Wellington Street West 2nd Floor

    Toronto, Ontario

    Canada, M5V 3L3

    Registrar

    MUFG Corporate Markets (Jersey) Limited

    12 Castle Street

    St. Helier

    Jersey, JE2 3RT

    CREST Agent, UK Paying Agent and Transfer Agent

    MUFG Corporate Markets

    Central Square

    29 Wellington Street

    Leeds, LS1 4DL

    Independent Auditor

    RSM Channel Islands (Audit) Limited

    13-14 Esplanade

    St Helier

    Jersey, JE4 9RJ

    Marketing Agent

    Kepler Partners LLP

    70 Conduit Street

    London

    W1S 2GF

    Financial Calendar

    Annual Results

    Announced March 2025

    Dividend Payment Dates

    Last Business Day of January, April, July and October

    Annual General Meetings

    19 June 2025

    Half-Yearly Results

    Announced September 2025

    Information Sources

    For more information about the Company and Fund, visit the website www.middlefield.co.uk

    Managing Risks

    The Company’s risk assessment and the way in which significant risks are managed is a key focus for the Board. It is guided by the Board’s assessment of the risks arising in the Company’s operations and identification and oversight of the controls exercised by the Board and its delegates, the Investment Manager and other service providers. This information is documented in the Company’s business risk matrix, a valuable tool for identifying and monitoring principal risks.

    The directors consider the primary risks facing the Company as those that could substantially jeopardise its capacity to achieve its investment objectives, maintain solvency, liquidity, or viability. In evaluating these key risks, the directors analyse the Company’s vulnerability to various factors that could lead to significant devaluation, such as potential recession, geopolitical instability, commodity price shocks, persistent inflation, supply chain interruptions, the effects of climate risk on investee firms, foreign exchange fluctuations, the consequences of restrictive monetary policies, and the influence of increased interest rates on both the Company and investor sentiment.

    At the time of this report, trade policy uncertainty and geopolitical tensions are having an impact at both macro and micro levels. While the long-term severity and the impact on the Company’s principal risks and viability cannot currently be predicted with any accuracy, it is expected that an escalation in ongoing geopolitical conflicts and severe trade restrictions would have detrimental effects.

    Strategy Risks

    Risk Mitigants Change from 2024
    Macroeconomic and political environment

    Unfavourable changes to the macro political and economic environment including global trade tensions, and climate risk pressures, causes the investment objective to become obsolete with reduced investor demand.

    The Board has established guidelines to ensure that the investment policy is pursued by the Investment Manager. The Board reviews the Investment Manager’s compliance with the agreed investment restrictions, investment performance and risk against investment objectives and strategy, the portfolio’s risk profile and appropriate strategies employed to mitigate any negative impact of substantial changes in markets. Trade policy uncertainty
    Inflation and Interest Rates

    Inflation has been trending lower but has the potential to re-accelerate. Central banks have been loosening monetary policy after obtaining evidence that inflation continues trending downwards.

    The Investment Manager monitors the portfolio daily and considers the portfolio’s sensitivity to interest rates. The Investment Manager also monitors the borrowing rates and weighs the benefits of gearing against its costs. Inflation outlook has improved

    Rates continue their downward trend

    Share price discount to NAV

    Continued trading of the Fund’s share price at a level below that of its NAV reflects a lack of liquidity and/or lack of investor interest in the Fund’s shares. A share price discount to NAV will prevent the Fund from growing via the issue of additional shares and may cause a persistent discount to widen further. The Fund’s level of discount has been significant for a prolonged period and a lack of demand for the Fund’s shares has provided the opportunity for an activist investor to acquire a significant stake in the Fund over a relatively short period of time.

    The Board, the Investment Manager and Broker monitor the share price and level of discount on a regular basis.

    During the year, the Board, the Investment Manager and Broker have spent considerable time engaging with existing and potential shareholders to understand investors’ needs and best interests and to help improve investor interest in the Fund’s shares. This included liaising directly with Saba, as the Fund’s largest shareholder, and holding constructive talks with Saba and existing shareholders to address investor concerns and adapt to shareholder needs.

    In assessing whether to conduct buybacks, the directors take into account market factors, the discounts of comparable funds and the size of the Fund and the shrinkage in its asset base which would necessarily result from the Fund repurchasing its own shares.

    Saba becoming the largest shareholder of the Fund.
    Gearing

    The utilisation of gearing increases the impacts of adverse movements in equity prices or interest rates and may require the Company to liquidate positions at inopportune times in order to maintain the correct levels of gearing.

    The Company maintains a prudent level of gearing and the loan to value ratio is monitored on a daily basis as part of the valuation process, so that in falling markets the Company will be able to take proactive steps to reduce gearing to avoid breaching its investment policy and any loan to value covenants. Unchanged
    Shareholder Activism

    A failure to adapt to changes in the market and investor demand might leave the Company exposed to the risk of further shareholder dissatisfaction, activism, and influence.

    The Board, Investment Manager and Broker engage directly with shareholders to understand investors’ needs and best interests.

    The Investment Manager and Broker regularly monitor movements in the Fund’s share register.

    Saba becoming the largest shareholder of the Fund

    Portfolio Risks

    Risk Mitigants Change from 2024  
    Regulatory & Legal Risks

    The Company is primarily focused on Canadian companies that may have operations in, or be exposed to, regulatory risks in many other countries. These have the potential of negatively impacting the efficiency and structure of the Company.

    The Investment Manager and the Board are kept abreast of changes to all relevant laws by the Company’s legal and tax advisers, secretary, Administrator and Auditor. Unchanged
    Income/Dividend

    The Company sets its target dividend at a rate it expects to earn from the dividends received from its underlying equity investments based upon robust modelling and assumptions.

    Failure by those investments to meet expectations due to, for example, decreased operating margins, changes in tax treatment of dividends, increased borrowing costs or poor underlying performance, may prevent the Company from being able to meet its target dividend.

    The Investment Manager’s allocation process seeks to select investments capable of producing strong reliable dividends and future capital growth across a diverse range of sectors. Day to day risk management techniques seek to diversify risk and monitor high levels of volatility. The Board monitors the income received on investments and available for distribution prior to the declaration of each dividend. Unchanged  

    Operational Risks

    Risk Mitigants Change from 2024
    Key man Risks

    The Company is reliant on key individuals of the Investment Manager to meet its investment objective and for growing the Company’s shareholder base.

    The Company’s portfolio is managed by a team of investment professionals led by Dean Orrico and Rob Lauzon. Unchanged
    Service provider performance

    The Company is reliant on the performance, safe custody of assets and data and internal controls of its service providers for its day-to-day activities. Poor performance or failure to meet their contractual obligations, including the absence of adequate business continuity plans and data and cyber security, could negatively impact the operations, reputation, governance and cost efficiency of the Company.

    Due diligence is carried out on all service providers prior to their appointment, with their level of service monitored continually and assessed formally by the Management Engagement Committee on an annual basis.

    The Board monitors the performance of the Investment Manager at every Board meeting and otherwise as appropriate.

    Unchanged

    Financial Risks

    Risk Mitigants Change from 2024
    Market Risks

    The Company may generate a loss on its investments at realisation due to adverse movements in their share prices, currency or interest rate movements.

    The directors monitor the Investment Manager’s compliance with the Company’s stated investment policy and review the investment performance. Unchanged
    Liquidity Risk

    The Company may hold positions, long or short, in securities that may not be able to be sold or bought quickly enough so as to prevent or minimise a loss.

    The Fund primarily invests in securities that are readily realisable, mainly issued by Canadian companies and REITS listed on a Canadian Stock Exchange and are actively traded. Unchanged

    Emerging Risks

    Tensions in the Middle East remain a key geopolitical risk, impacting global markets and supply chains. The events have led to regional instability, with concerns of a broader conflict involving the US, Iran, and other regional powers. Although there are current diplomatic efforts to reach a ceasefire in both Ukraine and Israel, these conflicts have the potential to disrupt global trade routes, commodity prices, and investor sentiment. The US has increased sanctions on Iranian-linked groups while also seeking to prevent direct conflict with Iran. As we’re currently witnessing, long-term stability will require diplomatic engagement, economic incentives, and security assurances to prevent further escalation. A resolution could help tame commodity price volatility, restore trade flows, and ease investor concerns over prolonged geopolitical uncertainty.

    In July 2024, the unwinding of the FX carry trade triggered a sharp selloff in global markets. Investors had been borrowing in low-yielding currencies, particularly the Japanese Yen, to fund investments in higher-yielding assets, taking advantage of Japan’s ultra-low-interest rate environment. However, speculation that the Bank of Japan (BOJ) would tighten monetary policy and allow interest rates to rise led to a sudden surge in the Yen. As a result, investors were forced to unwind their positions, causing widespread deleveraging and significant volatility across asset classes. The BOJ’s measured approach to adjust policies prevented further panic, but investors remain cautious of further FX-driven volatility.

    The 2024 election cycle was one of the most consequential in recent history and reshaped global trade policies, leadership dynamics, and economic strategies, driving market volatility. While some elections reinforced political continuity, others led to major shifts in international relations, trade agreements, and economic policies. In the US, Trump’s return to office signalled a shift toward protectionist trade policies, deregulation, and energy independence, with renewed emphasis on tariffs, border security, and reshoring manufacturing. His administration’s approach to China, Mexico, and Canada has already introduced trade policy uncertainty, including the temporary threat of 25% tariffs on Canadian and Mexican imports. Markets reacted with heightened volatility, particularly in trade-exposed sectors, as investors assessed the long-term impact of potential USMCA renegotiations and increased trade restrictions. Looking ahead, the 2025 Canadian federal election could reshape economic policies and business sentiment. A pro-business environment, conservative leadership shift could accelerate deregulation and foster a more investment-friendly environment. With rising protectionist rhetoric in the US, Canada’s focus may shift towards strengthening non-US trade relationships. As global political landscapes evolve, markets will continue to navigate shifting policies, impacting investment strategies in the year ahead.

    Emerging risks, along with all other risks the directors have identified the Company to be exposed to, are monitored via the Company’s risk register. During the year, as part of their regular review and assessment of risk, the directors have considered the ongoing discussions with Saba and the potential impact of the requisition on the Fund’s future structure. The fund is a closed-ended investment fund and thus is not required to comply with LR 6.6.1R(13) or LR 6.6.8R due to LR11.4.22R.

    Going Concern and Viability

    The performance of the investments held by the Fund over the reporting year is reflected in the Statement of Comprehensive Income and in notes 3 and 22 to the financial statements and the outlook for the future is described in the Chairman’s Report and the Investment Manager’s Report. The Company’s financial position, its cash flows and liquidity position are set out in the financial statements and the Company’s financial risk management objectives and policies, details of its financial instruments and its exposures to market price risk, credit risk, liquidity risk, interest rate risk, currency risk and country risk are set out at note 16 to the financial statements. The Company’s long-term viability and assessment of longer-term risks to which the Company is exposed are also reported upon in the Company’s long-term viability statement included below.

    The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, supported by the directors’ current assessment of the Company’s position based on the following factors:

    •        ongoing shareholder interest in the continuation of the Fund;

    •        the Fund has sufficient liquidity in the form of cash assets to meet all on-going expenses;

    •        should the need arise, the directors have the option to reduce dividend payments in order to positively affect the Fund’s cash flows;

    •        the Fund’s investments in Canadian and U.S. securities are readily realisable to meet liquidity requirements, if necessary; and

    •        assuming the Fund’s trading in a security represented 30% of the average daily trading volume of that security, 100% of portfolio’s holdings can be liquidated in under 5 working days.

    Based on the above, in the opinion of the directors, there is a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future.

    The directors have also considered the application of the SORP for Financial Statements of Investment Trust Companies and Venture Capital Trusts, whereby the going concern basis of preparation of the financial statements is considered appropriate until a vote is passed to discontinue the Fund or Company. There is no requirement under the Company’s and Fund’s articles of association to propose any continuation vote in respect of either the Company as a whole or the Fund itself and the directors have no intention of proposing any continuation vote in the foreseeable future, subject to unforeseen future events. For these reasons, the financial statements have been prepared using the going concern basis.

    The accompanying financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, which assumes the Company will continue to operate and meet its obligations as they fall due. However, the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern is subject to material uncertainty. Since the Company’s year end, on 10 February 2025 the Company, together with three other UK-listed closed-end funds, received a requisition notice from Saba, marking the second phase of Saba’s recent activist campaign in the UK-listed closed-end fund sector. The first phase commenced on 18 December 2024 with Saba requisitioning general meetings at seven UK-listed closed-end funds, proposing resolutions (each of which later failed) to remove the current independent directors of those seven funds and replace them with Saba’s own appointees, with a view to also terminating the management contracts and, in due course, replacing the investment managers with Saba. The requisition notice received by the Company on 10 February 2025 was for the approval by shareholders of the taking of all necessary steps to implement a scheme or process by which shareholders would become (or have the option to become) shareholders of a UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle) implementing a substantially similar strategy to the Company. Such scheme or process could entail shareholders rolling into an existing or newly established UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle), in either case managed by the Company’s existing investment manager or one of its affiliates. Following consultation with a number of the Company’s largest shareholders including Saba, and following constructive discussions with Saba, on 21 February 2025 the Company announced that Saba had agreed to withdraw its requisition notice for a period of 60 days to enable the Company and its advisers to formulate proposals that are in the best interests of all shareholders. At the current time, the Board is in the process of considering a number of strategic options in the best interests of shareholders as a whole. A further announcement regarding future proposals which the Company may put to shareholders will be made in due course. Although the Board is confident that the Company will have sufficient financial resources to meet its obligations due within twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements, the uncertain future outcome of the Board’s deliberations indicates the existence of a material uncertainty that may cast significant doubt on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern. Nevertheless, the Board believes that it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.

    Viability Statement

    Provision 36 of the AIC Code includes a recommendation that the directors publish a long-term viability statement and this statement is intended to meet that requirement.

    The Board of directors regularly assesses the viability of the Company for at least the three years following the date of that review. The Board believes that this three-year period remains the appropriate period over which to assess the Company’s viability because the Company’s shareholders and other stakeholders desire long-term certainty as to the Company’s viability. The Board does not consider it feasible to anticipate with any reasonable degree of certainty the viability of the Company for a period longer than three years. In considering the Company’s viability, the Board considers the Company’s current position and the principal and emerging risks to which it is exposed, as set out on pages 30 to 33, the viability of its investment objective and policy, market risks, the ongoing charges ratio, the liquidity of its investments, the ability to use hedging as a portfolio management tool, gearing and the reduction in reliance of the Canadian economy on energy as it diversifies into promising growth industries, such as healthcare and technology.

    The Board considers the impacts on the Company’s business plan and viability if severe principal and emerging risks are applied. Certain financial risks were considered under a scenario analysis that stress tests the portfolio against historic market shocks, including the 2008 Lehman Default, the 2011 Debt Ceiling Crisis and the 2015 Greece Financial Crisis. It is expected that the value of the Fund’s total investments as at 31 December 2024 would have experienced drawdowns of 22.7 per cent, 13.0 per cent and 1.5 per cent, respectively. Strategy, portfolio and market risks were also considered under a stress tested scenario where adverse movements in currency of 15 per cent are experienced, operating expenses increase by 20 per cent and gearing is reduced to zero due to higher interest rates. Under this scenario, the Fund’s revenue is expected to decline by approximately £1,629,698, its net profit is expected to decline by £1,161,351 and the dividend coverage of the Fund is expected to decline to 84 per cent. This analysis is relative to fiscal 2024 results and incorporates the dividend increase announced in January 2025.

    The directors have made a robust assessment of principal risks and, together with the Company’s Investment Manager, have adopted procedures and strategies to mitigate these risks. The Fund has an established Investment Policy, which has been approved and is monitored by the directors. The Investment Manager regularly updates the directors on the Company’s portfolio and the overall status of the market. The directors engage tax accountants to perform an investment trust test (for compliance with the requirement to distribute at least 85% of investment income received) on an annual basis). A solvency test is also undertaken (in compliance with Jersey company law) before any dividend is declared.

    Notwithstanding the ongoing uncertainty caused by geopolitical events, higher interest rates and inflation, if the Company’s income, expenses and dividends remain substantially unchanged in 2024 and 2025, the Company will hold sufficient cash to pay all of its expenses and the current rate of dividends for at least the next 12 months following the date of approval of this annual financial report. In addition, the Board reviews the liquidity of the Company’s investments on a quarterly basis and the Company’s investment portfolio remains extremely liquid. The Board is confident, based on its regular monitoring of liquidity, that additional cash can be raised very quickly if needed through sale of investments.

    The Fund has a credit facility agreement with RBC whereby RBC provides the credit facility, with a maximum principal amount of the lesser of CAD 75,000,000 and 25 per cent. of the total asset value of the Fund. Based on the Fund’s total assets of GBP 172,062,473 as at 31 December 2024, a decrease in total assets of GBP 56,481,233, or 32.83 per cent of assets, would be required for the principal amount to exceed 25 per cent of the total asset value of the fund.

    In 2024, the level of net gearing was kept relatively consistent at an average level of 15.9 per cent. At the year -end it stood at 16.2 percent on a gross basis and 19.3 per cent net.

    Following careful consideration and analysis of all material risk factors, the Board acknowledged the ongoing uncertainty as set out under the going concern and viability statement on page 33 and believes that the Company remains viable for the foreseeable future.

    Key Performance Indicators At each Board meeting, the Board considers several performance measures to assess the Company’s success in achieving its objectives. The key performance indicators (KPIs) used to measure the progress and performance of the Company, and which are comparable to other investment trusts, are set out below.

    In addition, the Board regularly reviews the performance of the portfolio from both a net asset value and share price perspective and compares this against various companies and indices. The Board also reviews the performance of the portfolio against its benchmark; the S&P TSX High Dividend Index. Information on the Company’s performance is given in the Chairman’s Statement and Investment Manager’s Report.

    Key performance indicator 2024

    Value

    2023

    Value

    NAV per share 134.05 pence 121.55 pence
    NAV total return performance for the year 15.1% (1.4%)
    Benchmark Index* 7.6% 3.9%
    Share price 116 pence 101.10 pence
    Discount to NAV (13.47%) (16.84%)
    Dividend paid in the year 5.3 pence 5.2 pence
    Ongoing charges** 1.30% 1.33%

    * S&P/TSX High Dividend Index, total return basis.

    ** refer to page 42.

    Borrowings

    At 31 December 2024, the amount drawn down under the credit facility was CAD 52 million (GBP equivalent at amortised cost of £28,884,872). For further details, please refer to Note 14. Loan Payable on page 71.

    Future Developments

    Details of the main trends and factors likely to affect the future development, performance and position of the Company’s business can be found in the Investment Manager’s Report on pages 11 to 15. Further details as to the risks affecting the Company are set out on pages 30 to 33.

    Environmental, Social and Governance Matters (‘ESG’)

    The Board and the Investment Manager believe that companies should operate in a socially responsible manner. Day-to-day decisions regarding the Company’s investment portfolio have been delegated to the Investment Manager. While MCT is not explicitly focused on ESG or sustainability, it acknowledges the increasing importance that non-financial factors including social and environmental issues can have on the share price, as well as the reputation of companies. Specialists at the Investment Manager are responsible for evaluating how companies address and report on social and environmental risks specific to their industries. Their goal is to integrate ESG criteria into the Investment Manager’s decision-making processes for stock selection and to promote ESG disclosure. The Investment Manager is mindful of its influence on the consideration of ESG matters by the Fund’s investee companies. Alongside portfolio construction decisions, the Investment Manager continuously monitors investee companies for ESG compliance. Company monitoring, including engagement processes such as voting and communication with management and Company board members, is part of the Investment Manager’s responsibilities. The Investment Manager’s ESG policy can be found on pages 16 to 18.

    Institutional Voting Policy

    The Company’s policy is that a decision on whether to vote on matters proposed by its investees is to be based on the nature of the matter being proposed. In the ordinary course of business, voting decisions have been delegated to the Investment Manager.

    The Investment Manager’s proxy voting policies are designed to be general in nature and the Investment Manager aims to exercise its proxy voting on all securities held. When exercising voting rights, the Investment Manager will generally vote with management of the issuer. For each proxy, the Investment Manager incorporates research and considers the recommendations provided by Glass Lewis, the Investment Manager’s proxy advisor, in exercising its voting rights. All proxy UK voting is conducted through Glass Lewis Viewpoint and /proxy voting is a key element of the Investment Manager’s stewardship of the assets it manages, which is adjunct to the integration of ESG factors into its investment process.

    On a monthly basis, the Investment Manager’s portfolio managers generate a list of issuers whose weightings represent more than 3% of the Fund’s net assets at the month-end preceding the voting date. For each of these issuers, the Investment Manager will record comments which support the rationale for the proxy decision made. For example, comments would be registered in Glass Lewis Viewpoint if the Investment Manager’s proxy voting decision differs from the recommendation from management or Jersey Glass Lewis. Copies of all proxy records are retained and available in Glass Lewis Viewpoint.

    Board Diversity and Experience

    The Company’s affairs are overseen by a Board comprised of five non-executive directors, two of whom are female. The directors’ biographies are included on pages 26 to 27 above, demonstrating the diversity of their experience including, but not limited to, investment management, corporate governance, corporate law, banking, accounting and audit and ESG matters.

    The directors regularly consider the leadership needs and specific skills required to manage the Company’s affairs in the best interests of its shareholders and other stakeholders and take account of diversity recommendations in their succession planning. The Board is cognisant of the requirements of listing rule 6.6.6R (9) and the tables below provide the relevant data required by listing rules 6.6.6R (9) to (11) and annex 1R to listing rule 6. The Board is not yet fully compliant with these rules, because none of the directors is from a minority ethnic background, but will continue to work towards compliance in a structured and orderly manner. The directors have decided that in future, in order to reach a broader range of diverse candidates, they will consider using one or more UK external search agents to assist with the search for new directors.

    The following table represents the gender identity of the Board as of the date of approval of this annual financial report and includes the information required by Listing Rule 6.6.6(9) and Annex 1 to Listing Rule 6, this data having been obtained by polling the directors:

      Number of Board Members Percentage of the Board Number of Senior Positions on the Board (CEO, CFO, SID and Chair) Number in Executive Management Percentage of Executive Management
    Men 3 60% 1 N/A – No executive Management N/A – No executive Management
    Women 2 40% 1 N/A – No executive Management N/A – No executive Management
    Not specified/prefer not to say 0 0% 0 N/A – No executive Management N/A – No executive Management

    The following table represents the ethnic background of the Board as of the date of approval of this annual financial report and includes the information required by Listing Rule 6.6.6(10) and Annex 1 to Listing Rule 6, this data having been obtained by polling the directors:

      Number of Board Members Percentage of the Board Number of Senior Positions on the Board (CEO, CFO, SID and Chair) Number in Executive Management Percentage of Executive Management
    White British or other White (including minority-white groups) 5 100% 2 N/A – No executive Management N/A – No executive Management
    Mixed/Multiple Ethnic Groups 0 0% 0 N/A – No executive Management N/A – No executive Management
    Asian/Asian British 0 0% 0 N/A – No executive Management N/A – No executive Management
    Black/African/
    Caribbean/ Black British
    0 0% 0 N/A – No executive Management N/A – No executive Management
    Other ethnic group, including Arab 0 0% 0 N/A – No executive Management N/A – No executive Management
    Not specified/prefer not to say 0 0% 0 N/A – No executive Management N/A – No executive Management

    REPORT OF DIRECTORS

    The Directors present their report and the audited financial statements of the Company for the year ended 31 December 2024.

    Results and Dividend Policy

    The results for the year are shown in the Statement of Comprehensive Income on page 61 and related notes on pages 64 to 80. Four interim dividends of 1.325 pence per share were declared and paid on account during the year ended 31 December 2024. In early 2025, a dividend of 1.375 pence per share was paid on 31 January 2025.

    The Board is aware of the current circumstances surrounding inflation, higher interest rates and the evolving geopolitical landscape and their significant impact on economies and financial markets. As a result, we will be keeping the future level of dividends under close review.

    Currently, we remain confident that our dividend can be paid based on the solvency and future viability of the Fund.

    In light of the excess revenue earnings generated by the Fund this year, together with the prospect of dividend growth from the underlying portfolio, the board approved a 0.2p increase to the total dividends payable in 2025. This results in a new dividend rate of 5.5 pence per share per annum payable in 2025 on a quarterly basis in equal instalments. These figures are targets only and do not constitute, nor should they be interpreted as, a profit forecast.

    In addition, this is a target only and should not be treated as an assurance or guarantee of performance. If the Company’s results permit it, the Board may consider further increases to the rate of dividends paid to shareholders at the appropriate time.

    The current dividend rate of 1.375 pence per share per quarter is expected to be supported by dividend and interest income earned by the Fund.

    Directors’ Conflicts of Interest

    A director must avoid a situation where he or she has or might have a direct or indirect interest that either conflicts with or has the potential to conflict with the Company’s interests. The Company’s and Fund’s Articles of Association give the directors authority to authorise potential conflicts of interest and there are safeguards in place which will apply whenever the directors decide that such are necessary or desirable. Firstly, only directors who have no interest in the matter being considered are able to vote upon the relevant decision, and secondly, in voting on the decision, the directors must act in a way they consider, in good faith, will be in the best interests of the Company. The directors can impose limits or conditions when giving authorisation if they consider this to be appropriate.

    The directors declare any potential conflicts of interest to the Board at each Board meeting. Any actual or potential conflicts of interest are entered into the Company’s register of such conflicts, which register is reviewed regularly by the Board. The register of conflicts of interest is kept at the Company’s registered office. The directors advise the Secretary as soon as they become aware of any new actual or potential conflicts of interest or any material changes to an existing conflict.

    Share Capital

    The Fund has the power to issue an unlimited number of shares of no par value which may be issued as redeemable participating preference shares or otherwise and which may be denominated in Sterling or any other currency.

    There are currently 2 Management Shares of no par value in the Company (issued on incorporation) and 124,682,250 Fund Shares in issue. As at 31 December 2024, 18,235,000 (2023: 18,195,000) Fund Shares were held in treasury. Since the financial year end and up to the date of this report, no Fund Shares had been sold out of or repurchased into treasury, and there remain 18,235,000 Fund Shares held in treasury, which may in future be sold out of treasury to satisfy market demand. Accordingly, the number of Fund Shares in issue and with voting rights attached is currently 106,447,250 (2023: 106,487,250) and this figure may be used by shareholders as the denominator for calculations by which they will determine if they are required to notify their interest in, or a change to their interest in, the Company under FCA’s Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules.

    Further issues and Repurchases of Fund Shares

    The Fund’s Articles of Association provide the Board of directors with authority to issue further Fund Shares without seeking shareholders’ approval, although, unless otherwise authorised by shareholders, such Fund Shares must be issued on a pre-emptive basis. However, at the Cell AGM held on 13 June 2024, the Fund’s shareholders authorised the issue or sale out of treasury of Fund Shares representing up to 10 per cent. of the Fund’s issued share capital as at the date of the Cell AGM on a non-pre-emptive basis. Such issues or sales will only be effected in the event of investor demand which cannot be met through the market and will only be conducted at a price equal to or above the prevailing NAV.

    The aforementioned authority expires on the earlier of 30 September 2025 or the conclusion of the next Cell AGM.

    The Fund’s Articles of Association also provide the Board of directors with authority to repurchase Fund Shares, provided that such repurchases are made with shareholders’ prior approval.

    At the Cell AGM held on 13 June 2024, the Fund’s shareholders authorised the Board to make market purchases of up to 15,962,438 Fund Shares (representing 14.99 per cent. of the Fund’s issued share capital as at the date of the Cell AGM), provided that no such purchases may be made at a price above the prevailing net asset value per Fund Share on the date of any such purchase.

    The aforementioned authority also expires on the earlier of 30 September 2025 or the conclusion of the next Cell AGM.

    At the next Cell AGM, the Board will be seeking renewal of its authority to issue or sell out of treasury additional Fund Shares and to make market acquisitions of Fund Shares. The Fund conducted two share buybacks during 2024, The Board believes that it is important to retain the authority to buyback where appropriate (which, in turn is likely to depend on, inter alia, the prevailing discount rating of the Fund Shares, the financial resources that the Company has at its disposal, liquidity levels in the Fund Shares and the size of the Company). Buybacks can confer several benefits on remaining shareholders: they are accretive to NAV and can provide additional useful liquidity.

    Holdings in the Company’s Shares

    As at the year end and as at 28 February 2025, being the most recent practicable date prior to the publication of this Annual Financial Report, the Company had received notification in accordance with the Financial Conduct Authority’s Disclosure and Transparency Rule 5 of the following interests in 5 per cent or more of the Fund’s issued share capital with voting rights attached, where the Board has been advised that the holder retains a holding in excess of 5 per cent.

    Name Redeemable Participating

    Preference Shares

    31 December 2024

    31

    31 December 2024

    Redeemable Participating

    Preference Shares

    31 December 2024

    Redeemable Participating

    Preference Shares

    28 February 2025

      Number of Shares % of Shares in issue Number of Shares
    Saba Capital Management, L.P.* 31,048,865 29.12% 31,048,865

    M&G PLC

    9,794,162

    9.20%

    9,794,162

    JP Morgan Chase & Co NIL NIL 5,479,118

    * Of the 29.1% holding disclosed by Saba Capital Management L.P. 17.6% interest is held via total return swaps and the counterparty to such swaps may be separately disclosed in the table and result in double disclosure of such shares

    Fund Shares are redeemable at the sole option of the directors and therefore classified as equity in the Statement of Financial Position.

    Reappointment of Auditor

    RSM Channel Islands (Audit) Limited has expressed its willingness to continue in office as auditor and a resolution to re-appoint it will be proposed at the Company’s and Fund’s forthcoming AGMs.

    Related Party Transactions

    The Company’s related parties are its directors and the Investment Manager. There were no related party transactions (as defined in the Listing Rules) during the year under review, nor up to the date of this report. Details of the remuneration paid to the directors and the Investment Manager during the year under review are shown in note 13.

    Annual General Meetings (‘AGMs’)

    This year’s AGMs will be held on 19 June 2025. Shareholders are welcome to attend the AGMs in person. The AGM Notices and details of the resolutions to be proposed are being sent to shareholders with this annual financial report. Shareholders can also write to the Company for further details at its registered office or by e-mail to the Secretary at Middlefield.Cosec@JTCGroup.com.

    Directors’ Statement as to Disclosure of Information to the Auditor

    Each of the persons who is a director at the date of approval of this annual financial report confirms that:

    •         so far as the director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditor is unaware; and

    •        the director has taken all steps that he should have taken as a director in order to make himself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditor is aware of that information.

    Approval

    This Strategic Report was approved by the Board on 24 March 2025 and is signed on their behalf by:

    Michael Phair        Andrew Zychowski

    Director        Director

    Corporate Governance

    Statement of Directors Responsibilities

    Directors’ Responsibility Statement

    The directors are responsible for preparing the annual financial report in accordance with applicable law and regulations. The Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, as amended (the “Companies Law”) requires the directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year which gives a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Company and Fund as at the end of the financial year and of the profit or loss for that year. The directors have elected to prepare the financial statements under UK-adopted IFRS.

    International Accounting Standard 1 requires that financial statements present fairly for each financial period the Company’s and Fund’s financial position, financial performance and cash flows. This requires the faithful representation of the effects of transactions, other events and conditions in accordance with the definitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, income and expenses set out in the International Accounting Standards Board’s ‘Framework for the preparation and presentation of financial statements’. In virtually all circumstances, a fair presentation will be achieved by compliance with all applicable IFRS. However, directors are also required to:

    •        properly select and apply accounting policies;

    •        present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable information;

    •        provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specific requirements in IFRS are insufficient to enable users to understand the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the Company’s and Fund’s financial position and performance; and

    •        make an assessment on the Company’s and Fund’s ability to continue as a going concern.

    The directors are responsible for keeping proper accounting records that disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company and enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the Companies Law. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Company and Fund, and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

    The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the Company’s website www.middlefield.co.uk.

    Legislation in Jersey and the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. Having taken advice from the Audit Committee, the Board considers the report and accounts, taken as a whole, as fair, balanced and understandable and that it provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s and Fund’s performance, business model and strategy.

    We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

    1.        the financial statements, prepared in accordance with under UK-adopted IFRS, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and Fund;

    2.        the Chairman’s Statement, Investment Manager’s Report and notes to the financial statements incorporated herein by reference include a fair review of the development, performance and position of the Company and Fund, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that it faces; and

    3.        the annual report and financial statements, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s and Fund’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

    By order of the Board:

    Michael Phair        Andrew Zychowski

    Director                Director

    Date: 24 March 2025

    Directors’ Remuneration Report

    Remuneration Report

    Remuneration policy

    The Company’s remuneration policy is designed to ensure that the remuneration of directors is set at a reasonable level commensurate with the duties and responsibilities of each director and the time commitment required to carry out their roles effectively. Remuneration will be such that the Company and Fund are able to attract and retain directors of appropriate experience and quality. The fees paid to directors will reflect the experience of the Board as a whole, will be fair, and will take account of the responsibilities attaching to each role given the nature of the Company’s interests, as well as the level of fees paid by comparable investment trusts and companies.

    Directors will be reimbursed for travel and subsistence expenses incurred in attending meetings or in carrying out any other duties incumbent upon them as directors of the Company or Fund. The level of directors’ fees paid will not exceed the limit set out in the Company’s and Fund’s Articles of Association.

    Directors’ Remuneration

    No director has a service contract with the Company or Fund and details of the directors’ fees are disclosed in note 13. The non-executive directors each earned the following fees in the 2024 and 2023 financial years:

    Director 2024 Fees 2023 Fees
    Philip Bisson (Resigned 1 June 2023) £10,440
    Dean Orrico
    Richard Hughes (Resigned 1 June 2023) £11,275
    Michael Phair £36,000 £33,500
    Kate Anderson £29,000 £27,000
    Janine Fraser £29,000 £27,000
    Andrew Zychowski (Appointed 30 June 2023) £32,000 £16,000

    Mr Orrico has waived his entitlement for remuneration for acting as a director, because of his employment by the Investment Manager. The directors receive no other remuneration or benefits from the Company other than the fees stated above. The directors are paid out of pocket expenses for attendance at Board meetings and for any other expenditure they incur when acting on the Company’s behalf.

    The remuneration of each director is determined by the Nomination and Remuneration Committee, with each director abstaining from discussion of and voting upon their own remuneration. When the directors’ remuneration is being considered, the Nomination and Remuneration Committee takes into account various factors including, but not limited to, the Company’s and individual directors’ performance, as well as each director’s time commitment to their role. To date, no external remuneration consultant has been appointed.

    For the year under review, the directors’ remuneration was set at £36,000 per annum for the chairman of the Board, £32,000 per annum for the chairman of the audit committee and £29,000 for all other directors bar Mr Orrico, who has waived his entitlement to remuneration for acting as a director.

    Shareholders’ Views

    The Board welcomes the opportunity to discuss matters of remuneration with shareholders at the Company’s and Fund’s AGMs or at any investor forum that may be held during the year.

    Letters of Appointment

    All directors are non-executive. Every director has a letter of appointment and the letters of appointment are available for inspection on the Company’s website.

    Directors’ Interests in Shares

    The interests as at 28 February 2025, 31 December 2024 and 2023 of the directors who served on the Board and their connected persons during the year were as follows:

      28 February 2025
    Fund Shares
    31 December 2024
    Fund Shares
    31 December 2023
    Fund Shares
    Dean Orrico 220,000 220,000 220,000
    Middlefield Limited (a company connected with Dean Orrico) 170,000 170,000
    Michael Phair (current Chairman) 70,000 70,000 70,000
    Andrew Zychowski (appointed 30 June 2023) 50,000 50,000 50,000
    Danuta Zychowska (a person connected to Andrew Zychowski) 83,000 83,000 83,000
    Kate Anderson
    Janine Fraser

    Directors’ dividends

    The following dividends were paid to Directors during the year as well as persons connected to the Directors.

      31 December 2024
    Dividend
    GBP
    31 December 2023
    Dividend
    GBP
    Philip Bisson (resigned 1 June 2023)
    Philean Trust Company Limited (a company connected with Philip Bisson until 1 June 2023) 11,731
    Probitas Trust Company Limited (a company connected with Philip Bisson until 1 June 2023) 3,900
    Beg Kaleh Services Limited (a company connected with Philip Bisson until 1 June 2023) 3,848
    Beg Kaleh Pension Limited (a company connected with Philip Bisson until 1 June 2023) 28,418
    Dean Orrico 11,660 11,440
    Middlefield Limited (A PCA of Mr Orrico and the Manager of the Company) 6,758
    Richard Hughes (resigned 1 June 2023) 2,637
    Cheng Sim Hughes (a person connected to Richard Hughes until 1 June 2023) 650
    Michael Phair (current Chairman) 3,710 3,640
    Andrew Zychowski (appointed 30 June 2023) 2,650 2,600
    Danuta Zychowska (a person connected to Andrew Zychowski) 4,399 4,316
    Kate Anderson
    Janine Fraser

    Ongoing Charges

    The below table shows the annualised ongoing charges that relate to the management of the Fund as a single percentage of the average NAV over the same year. In terms of the AIC’s methodology, ongoing charges are those expenses of a type which are likely to recur in the foreseeable future, whether charged to capital or revenue, and which relate to the operation of the Fund as a collective investment fund, excluding the costs of acquisition/disposal of investments, financing charges and gains/losses arising on investments.

      Ongoing
    charges (%)
    31 December 2024 1.30
    31 December 2023 1.33

    Applicable Corporate Governance Codes

    The Board is committed to achieving and demonstrating high standards of corporate governance. The Board is advised on all governance matters by the Secretary and has access to independent professional advice at the Company’s expense where it is judged necessary.

    As an overseas closed-ended investment fund which has been admitted to the Official List of the FCA and to trading on the London Stock Exchange’s Main Market for Listed Securities, the Company is required by listing rule 6.6.6R (5) and (6), as modified by listing rule 11.7.7R, to report how the Company has applied the Principles set out in the UK Corporate Governance Code (the “UK Code”) and whether the Company has complied throughout the accounting period with all relevant provisions of the UK Code and, if it has not complied with all provisions, those provisions with which it has not complied and its reasons for non-compliance.

    The AIC, of which the Company is a member, has published the AIC Code, which has been endorsed by the FRC and supported by the JFSC. The FRC has confirmed that, by following the AIC Code, investment company boards should fully meet their obligations in relation to the UK Code and paragraph LR 6.6.6 of the Listing Rules.

    The UK Code is available for download from the FRC’s web-site www.frc.org.uk and the AIC Code is available for download from the AIC’s website www.theaic.co.uk. Both of these documents can also be provided by the Secretary by e-mail upon request.

    Statement of Compliance

    The Board has considered the principles and recommendations of the AIC Code. The AIC Code addresses all the principles set out in the UK Code, as well as setting out additional principles and recommendations on issues that are of specific relevance to the Company. The Board considers that reporting against the principles and recommendations of the AIC Code provides better information to shareholders.

    The directors believe that the Company has complied with the provisions of the AIC Code, where appropriate, and that it has complied throughout the year with the provisions where the requirements are of a continuing nature.

    Responsibilities of the Board

    The Board is responsible for setting the Company’s Investment Objective and Investment Policy, subject to shareholders’ approval of any proposed material changes, and has a schedule of investment matters reserved for the directors’ resolution. The Board has contractually delegated to external agencies the management of the investment portfolio, the custodial services and the day-to-day accounting and secretarial requirements. Each of these contracts is only entered into after proper consideration by the Board of the quality of services being offered.

    Internal Controls

    The directors are responsible for overseeing the effectiveness of the Company’s risk management and internal control systems, which are designed to ensure that proper accounting records are maintained, that the financial information on which business decisions are made and which is issued for publication is reliable, and that the assets of the Company are safeguarded. However, such a system can only be designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and therefore can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss.

    Having reviewed the Company’s risk management and internal control systems and on the advice of the Audit Committee, the Board believes that they continue to be effective and that no changes thereto are necessary or desirable at this juncture. Because the Company delegates its day-to-day operations to third parties and has no employees, having reviewed the effectiveness of the internal control systems of the Administrator on a quarterly basis and having regard to the role of its external auditor, the Board does not consider that there is a need for the Company to establish its own internal audit function. The Administrator does however provide the Company’s compliance officer, who monitors the Company’s compliance with applicable laws and regulations and reports directly to the Board of directors on a quarterly basis.

    The Company receives reports from the Secretary and Administrator relating to its activities. Documented contractual arrangements are in place with the Secretary and Administrator, which define the areas where the Company has delegated authority to it. The Secretary ensures that the directors receive accurate, timely and clear information from all service providers.

    Directors

    Appointment, Retirement and Tenure

    As Mr Orrico is not independent of the Investment Manager, he is required by the FCA’s Listing Rules to submit himself for re-election annually. In addition, in accordance with the provisions of the AIC Code, and PIRC’s published guidance, all directors will continue to offer themselves for annual re-election for the foreseeable future.

    As the Company is a Jersey-regulated entity, the appointment of any new director is subject to the JFSC’s confirmation that they have no objection to such director’s appointment. It is also a regulatory requirement that the Company have at least two Jersey resident directors. Therefore, for so long as there are only two Jersey resident directors in office, any Jersey resident director who retires or whose re-election is not approved at a Company and Cell AGM will therefore remain in office until such time as a replacement Jersey-resident director acceptable to the JFSC has been appointed.

    The Board is of the view that length of service does not automatically compromise the independence or contribution of directors of an investment company, where continuity and experience can be a benefit to the Board. Furthermore, the Board agrees with the view expressed in the AIC Code that long-serving directors should not be prevented from forming part of an independent majority or from acting as Chairman. Consequently, no limit had previously been imposed on the directors’ overall length of service.

    However, the Board has noted that the AIC considers that directors who have served on the Board for more than nine years may not be independent and that certain corporate governance advisory bodies believe that directors should not serve more than nine years on an investment company’s Board. Therefore, in the spirit of best corporate governance, the Board has decided that any remunerated, independent director appointed in 2018 or thereafter shall only serve for a maximum of nine years before being required to retire from office.

    As stated in previous annual financial reports, the Board has recognised the merits of refreshing its composition as well as planning for future succession. The Board intends to continue evolving its composition on a periodic basis and has agreed a succession plan for the directors with over nine years of service. The Board’s advance planning for the retirement of directors ensures an orderly transition process that maintains an appropriate balance of skills and relevant experience. The Board has used open advertising in the past. The directors have decided that in future, in order to reach a broader range of diverse candidates, it will also consider using one or more UK external search agents to assist with the search for new directors.

    As required by the FCA’s Listing Rules, full biographical details of any additional directors appointed will be announced and he or she will stand for re-election at the next subsequent Company and Cell Meeting convened after their appointment and annually thereafter.

    Independence

    For the period 1 January 2024 to the date of this report, the Board consisted of five members, all of whom were non-executive. Mr Orrico is a director of Middlefield Limited, the Investment Manager and President of the Investment Advisor. All the directors, apart from Mr Orrico, are considered to be independent of the Investment Manager and free of any business or other relationship that could influence their ability to exercise independent judgement. The Board believes that Mr Orrico’s investment management experience as well as his first-hand knowledge of the Canadian economic and investment sector adds considerable value to the Company.

    The Board believes that Ms Anderson, Ms Fraser, Mr Phair and Mr Zychowski are independent in character and judgement and that their experience and knowledge of the specialised sector in which the Company operates adds significant strength to the Board. M Phair was also considered to be independent upon his appointment as Chairman. The directors believe that the Board has a balance of skills and experience which enable it to provide effective strategic leadership and proper governance of the Company. Information about the directors, including their relevant experience, can be found on pages 26 to 27.

    In accordance with the recommendations of the AIC Code, Ms Kate Anderson acted as Senior Independent Director. In-line with the AIC’s recommendation, Ms Anderson provides a sounding board for the chair and serves as an intermediary for the other directors and shareholders. She is responsible for coordinating a regular meeting, at least annually and on other occasions as necessary, of the non-executive directors (excluding the chair), to appraise the chair’s performance.

    Induction and Ongoing Training

    Although no formal training in corporate governance is given to directors, the directors are kept appraised of corporate governance issues through bulletins and training materials provided from time to time by the Secretary and the AIC.

    Directors’ Insurance

    The Company purchases directors’ and officers’ liability insurance cover at a level which is considered appropriate for the Company.

    Meeting Attendance

    The Board meets at least quarterly to review the overall business of the Company and to consider matters specifically reserved for its review. At these meetings, the Board monitors the investment performance of the Fund. The directors also review the Fund’s activities every quarter to ensure that it adheres to the Fund’s investment objective and policy or, if appropriate, to consider changes to that policy. Additional ad hoc reports are received as required and directors have access at all times to the advice and services of the Secretary, which is responsible for guiding the Board on procedures and applicable rules and regulations.

    The Board also receives and considers, together with representatives of the Investment Manager, reports in relation to the operational controls of the Investment Manager, Administrator, Custodian and Registrar. These reviews identified no issues of significance.

    The table below summarises the directors’ attendance at each type of meeting held during the year.

      Quarterly
    Board
    Ad hoc
    Board
    Audit
    Committee
    Nomination and
    Remuneration
    Committee
    Management
    Engagement
    Committee
    Dividend
    Committee**
    No. of meetings in the Year 4 2 4 2 1 4
    Dean Orrico* 4 2 4 2 1 0
    Janine Fraser*** 4 2 4 2 1 3
    Michael Phair 4 2 4 2 1 1
    Kate Anderson*** 4 2 4 2 1 0
    Andrew Zychowski 4 2 4 2 1 3

    *        Mr Orrico attended meetings of the Committees as an observer, not a member or participant.

    **        The quorum for a meeting of the Dividend Committee is one director physically present in the UK.

    ***        Ms Anderson and Ms Fraser attended as observers at the ad hoc Board meeting on 7 May 2024.

    The Board’s Committees

    Performance Evaluation

    The directors recognise the importance of the AIC Code in terms of evaluating the performance of the Board as a whole, its respective Committees and individual directors. After the year end, the performance of the Board, Committees of the Board and individual directors was assessed in terms of:

    •        attendance at Board and Committee Meetings;

    •        the independence of individual directors;

    •        the ability of individual directors to make an effective contribution to the Board and Committees of the Board, together with the diversity of skills and experience each director brings to meetings;

    •        the Board’s ability to effectively challenge the Investment Manager’s recommendations, suggest areas of debate and fix timetables for debates on the future strategy of the Company; and

    •        the Board’s diversity in terms of gender, social and ethnic backgrounds and cognitive and personal strengths and weaknesses.

    The directors concluded that the performance evaluation process had proven successful, with the Board, the Chairman, the Committees of the Board and the individual directors scoring well in all areas. The Board and the Committees of the Board continued to be effective, each director’s behaviour continued to be aligned to the Company’s purpose, values and strategy and the individual directors continued to demonstrate commitment to their respective roles and responsibilities. Although the Board did not procure an externally facilitated Board evaluation during the year under review, the directors will consider doing so at the appropriate time in the future.

    The Board also reviews its own policies and procedures on a periodic basis, as well as the terms of reference of its committees, to ensure that they serve to further the Company’s purpose and that they are aligned with the Company’s values and strategy. The Board with the support of the Secretary reviewed all of their policies, procedures and the terms of reference, all of which were updated (as applicable) to meet the recommendations of the AIC Code and concluded that they continued to be in a satisfactory form.

    Committees of the Board

    Audit Committee

    On 26 May 2010 an Audit Committee was established. The current members are Andrew Zychowski (Chairman), Michael Phair, Kate Anderson and Janine Fraser. Notwithstanding that Mr Phair is Chairman of the Board, he was independent on appointment and the Board considers that his experience and knowledge is of great value to the Audit Committee. A separate report from the Audit Committee is included at pages 48 to 50.

    Nomination and Remuneration Committee

    The Board has also established a Nomination and Remuneration Committee, which meets when necessary. At the present time, the current members are all the directors of the Company bar Mr Orrico, and their summary biographical details are set out on pages 26 to 27.

    The Chairman of the Nomination and Remuneration Committee is Andrew Zychowski or, failing him, any member of the Nomination and Remuneration Committee present within the United Kingdom other than the Chairman of the Company. The Board believes it is appropriate for all members of the Board (excluding Mr Orrico) to be on the Nomination and Remuneration Committee, because the directors work together collegiately, and each brings a different perspective to the Nomination and Remuneration Committee’s discussions.

    The key terms of reference of the Nomination and Remuneration Committee are set out below.

    •        The Committee oversees the process of identifying and nominating prospective directors.

    •        The Committee considers and monitors the level and structure of remuneration of the directors of the Company and the Fund.

    •        The Committee considers the need to appoint external remuneration consultants.

    •        The Committee is authorised, in consultation with the Secretary, where necessary to fulfil its duties, to obtain outside legal or other professional advice, including the advice of independent remuneration consultants, to secure the attendance of external advisors at its meetings, if it considers this necessary, and to obtain reliable up-to-date information about remuneration in other companies, all at the expense of the Fund.

    •        The Committee considers the overall levels of insurance cover for the Company, including directors’ and officers’ liability insurance.

    •        The Committee conducts a process annually to evaluate the performance of the Board and its individual directors.

    •        The Committee considers such other topics as directed by the Board.

    The Board believes that, subject to any exception explained in this report and the nature of the Company as an investment fund, it has complied with the applicable provisions of the AIC Code throughout the year. The Board has noted the recommendations of the AIC relating to Board diversity. Although the Board does not have a formal written policy on diversity and inclusion, the Board, advised by the Nomination and Remuneration Committee, considers diversity, including the balance of skills, knowledge, diversity (including gender) and experience amongst other factors when reviewing the composition of the Board and appointing new directors, but does not consider it appropriate to establish targets or quotas in this regard. Board diversity is carefully considered and will continue to be considered in the future.

    When considering the proposed appointment of new directors, the Nomination and Remuneration Committee receives full biographical information on all candidates and considers all matters which it considers relevant, including their experience and ability to devote sufficient time to the Company’s business. The process also takes into account numerous other factors including, but not limited to, each candidate’s experience, gender, social and ethnic background and personal strengths and weaknesses. Each director is interviewed by the Nomination and Remuneration Committee as part of the Board’s evaluation of prospective candidates. After their appointment, each director seeks the Board’s consent before taking on any other significant external appointments.

    Management Engagement Committee

    The Board established a Management Engagement Committee at its meeting held on 20 November 2013. In addition to regular reporting and engagement at Board meetings with its service providers, the Board formally reviews all service providers via the Management Engagement Committee. At the present time, the Management Engagement Committee’s members are all the directors of the Company bar Mr Orrico, who does not sit on the Management Engagement Committee because of the perceived conflict that his role as President of the Investment Advisor could present.

    The Chairman of the Management Engagement Committee is Andrew Zychowski or, failing him, any member of the Management Engagement Committee present within the United Kingdom other than the Chairman of the Company. For the purposes of transacting business, a quorum of the Management Engagement Committee is not less than two members of the Management Engagement Committee and all meetings must take place in the UK.

    The Board believes it is appropriate for all independent members of the Board to be on the Management Engagement Committee, because the directors work together collegiately and each brings a different perspective to the Management Engagement Committee’s discussions.

    Duties

    The Management Engagement Committee’s key duty is to review the performance by service providers of their duties and the terms of all agreements for the provision of services that the Company has entered into or will in future enter into.

    The Management Engagement Committee meets at least annually to specifically consider the ongoing management, administrative and secretarial and investment management requirements of the Company. The Management Engagement Committee receives self- evaluation questionnaires provided by all service providers, which include reporting on each service provider’s opinion of the quality of services provided by the Company’s other service providers, and the Board also receives detailed compliance reporting from the Company’s compliance officer, which the Management Engagement Committee takes into account when reviewing the services provided. The quality and timeliness of reports to the Board are also taken into account and the overall management of the Company’s affairs by the Investment Manager is considered. Based on its recent review of activities, and taking into account the performance of the portfolio, the other services provided by the key service providers, and the risk and governance environment in which the Company operates, the Board believes that the retention of the current key service providers on the current terms of their appointment remains in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders.

    The Board regularly reviews the performance of the services provided by these companies. A summary of the terms of the agreements with the Secretary, the Investment Manager and the Investment Advisor are set out in note 1 to the financial statements. After due consideration of the resources and reputations of those parties, the Board believes it is in the interests of shareholders to retain the services of all three providers for the foreseeable future.

    Terms of Reference of Committees

    The Terms of Reference of the Audit Committee, the Nomination and Remuneration Committee and the Management Engagement Committee are all available on the Company’s website and are also available for inspection at the Company’s registered office during normal business hours.

    Bribery Act 2010

    The Company has no employees. The Board has considered the Bribery Act 2010 and confirmed its zero tolerance of bribery and corruption in its business activities. It has received assurances from the Company’s main service providers that they will maintain adequate safeguards to protect against any form of bribery and corruption by their employees and agents.

    Criminal Finances Act 2017

    The Board has also considered the Criminal Finances Act 2017 and has received assurances from the Company’s main service providers that they will maintain adequate safeguards to protect against any form of illegal activities under this legislation, including the facilitation of tax evasion.

    Relations with Shareholders

    Shareholder relations are given a high priority by the Board, Investment Manager and Secretary. The primary medium through which the Company communicates with its shareholders is through the annual and half-yearly financial reports, which aim to provide shareholders with a full understanding of the Company’s activities and results. The information is supplemented by the daily publication of the NAV of the Fund Shares, monthly factsheets and information on the Company’s website operated by the Investment Manager. Shareholders have the opportunity to address questions to the Chairman and the Committees of the Board at the AGMs each year. Shareholders can also write to the Company at its registered office or by e-mail to the Secretary at Middlefield.Cosec@JTCGroup.com

    The Chairman is available and meets with major shareholders to discuss aspects of investment performance, governance and strategy and to listen to shareholders’ views, in order to help develop a balanced understanding of their issues and concerns. General presentations are given by the Investment Manager to both shareholders and analysts follow the publication of the annual financial results. In addition, the Investment Manager maintains a regular schedule of meetings throughout the year with major shareholders and keeps the Board updated with the outcome of such meetings.

    Report of the Audit Committee

    This report of the Audit Committee has been prepared with reference to the AIC Code. Established in 2010, the Audit Committee reports formally to the main Board at least twice each year. In accordance with written terms of reference, its delegated duties and responsibilities are reviewed and reapproved annually. The function of the Audit Committee is to ensure that the Company maintains high standards of integrity, financial reporting and internal controls.

    The members do not have any links with the Company’s Auditor. They are also independent of the management teams of the Investment Manager, the Administrator and all other service providers. The Audit Committee meets formally no less than twice a year in London and on an ad hoc basis if required.

    The Audit Committee considers the financial reporting by the Company and the Fund, the internal controls, and relations with the Company’s and the Fund’s Auditor. In addition, the Audit Committee reviews the independence and objectivity of the Auditor. The Committee meets at least twice a year to review the internal financial and non-financial controls, to approve the contents of the interim and annual reports and financial statements and to review accounting policies. Representatives of the Auditor attend the Committee meeting at which the draft Annual Financial Reports are reviewed and can speak to Committee members without the presence of representatives of the Investment Manager. The audit program and timetable are drawn up and agreed with the Auditor in advance of the financial year end. Items for audit focus are discussed, agreed and given particular attention during the audit process. The Auditor reports to the Committee on these items, among other matters. This report is considered by the Committee and discussed with the Auditor and the Investment Manager prior to approval and signature of the Annual Financial Report.

    The Audit Committee is authorised by the Board to investigate any activity within its terms of reference and to consult with outside legal or other independent professional advisers when deemed necessary in order to adequately discharge their duties and responsibilities, which include:

    •        Considering the appointment, resignation or dismissal of the Auditor and their independence and objectivity, particularly in circumstances where non-audit services have been provided.

    •        Reviewing the cost effectiveness of the external audit from time to time.

    •        Reviewing and challenging the half-yearly and Annual Financial Reports, focusing particularly on changes in accounting policies and practice, areas of accounting judgement and estimation, significant adjustments arising from audit or other review and the going concern assumption.

    •        Providing advice to the Board on whether the Annual Financial Report, taken as a whole, is fair balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the company’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

    •        Reviewing compliance with accounting standards and law and regulations including the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and the FCA’s Listing and Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules.

    •        Completing regular risk management reviews of internal controls, which include the review of the Fund’s Risk Register.

    •        Reviewing the effectiveness of the Company’s system of internal controls, including financial, operating, compliance, fraud and risk management controls and making and reporting to the Board any recommendations that may arise.

    •        Considering the major findings of internal investigations and making recommendations to the Board on appropriate action.

    •        Ensuring that arrangements exist whereby service providers and management may raise concerns over irregularities in financial reporting or other matters in confidence and that such concerns are independently investigated and remediated with appropriate action.

    The Audit Committee, having reviewed the effectiveness of the internal control systems of the Administrator on a quarterly basis, and having regard to the role of the Auditor, does not consider that there is a need for the Company or Fund to establish its own internal audit function. The Administrator does however provide the Company’s compliance officer, who monitors the Company’s compliance with applicable laws and regulations and reports directly to the Board of directors on a quarterly basis.

    Some of the principal duties of the Audit Committee are to consider the appointment of the Auditor, to discuss and agree with the Auditor the nature and scope of the audit, to review the scope of and to discuss the results and the effectiveness of the audit and the independence and objectivity of the Auditor, to review the Auditor’s letter of engagement and management letter and to analyse the key procedures adopted by the Company’s outsourced service providers including the Administrator and Custodian. The Audit Committee is responsible for monitoring the financial reporting process and the effectiveness of the Company’s and its service provider’s internal control and risk management systems. The Company’s risk assessment focus and the way in which significant risks are managed is a key area for the Committee. Work here was driven by the Committee’s assessment of the risks arising in the Company’s operations and identification of the controls exercised by the Board and its delegates, the Investment Manager and other service providers. These are recorded in the Company’s business risk matrix which continues to serve as an effective tool to highlight and monitor the principal risks.

    The Board also received and considered, together with representatives of the Investment Manager, reports in relation to the operational controls of the Investment Manager, Administrator, Custodian and Registrar. These reviews identified no issues of significance. The risks relating to the Company (including the Fund) are discussed by the directors and documented in detail in the minutes of each meeting.

    The Audit Committee is also responsible for overseeing the Company’s relationship with the Auditor, including making recommendations to the Board on the appointment and re-appointment of the Auditor and its remuneration.

    Significant Matters

    The significant matters that were subject to specific consideration in 2024 by the Committee and consultation with the Auditor where necessary were as follows:

    Valuation and ownership of securities

    There is a risk that the securities are incorrectly valued due to factors including low volume traded securities and errors in third party prices.

    Valuation of securities – at each valuation point, a price tolerance check is run.

    The following exceptions require further investigation:

    •        Prices outside the stated tolerance levels: Price movements need to be justified to underlying support.

    •        Stale prices: These need to be traced and agreed to support to ensure prices are not stale. Stale prices are escalated as per the pricing policy after being static for more than 7 days.

    •        Zero prices: Prices for these securities need to be investigated and added if applicable.

    There is also the risk that the securities are not directly owned by the Fund, which may be caused by errors in the recording of trade transactions.

    Ownership of securities – at each valuation point a stock reconciliation is performed, which entails tracing and agreeing the stock holding at valuation point to the Custodian records.

    Any differences are investigated.

    All new trades are traced and agreed to the contract note.

    Allocation to Capital and Revenue

    The Directors have made the critical judgement to allocate a proportion of management fees and finance to capital. This has been allocated 60% to capital and 40% to revenue.

    This has been done in accordance with the Association of Investment Companies’ Statement of Recommended Practice for Investment Trusts Companies.

    The Audit Committee challenged the allocation of charges between capital and revenue by comparing it with the policies of other companies in the AIC North American sector who allocate charges to both capital and revenue. MCT has a somewhat higher allocation to revenue than the peer group. Since MCT is the highest yielding fund in the sector, the Audit Committee considered the allocation to be appropriate following this review and discussion of the separate analysis provided by the Investment Manager.

    Compliance with Regulatory Requirements

    JTC Fund Solutions (Jersey) Limited as administrator works with the Board of directors to ensure that the Fund complies with its obligations under all applicable laws and regulations including, but not limited to:

    •        The Companies (Jersey) Law 1991

    •        The FCA’s listing rules, prospectus and disclosure guidance and transparency rules

    •        The AIC Code of Corporate Governance and

    •        The JFSC’s Codes of Practice for Certified Funds

    •        The Jersey Listed Fund Guide

    Going Concern

    The financial statements are prepared using the going concern basis based on the directors’ assessment that:

    •        The investment portfolio consists of listed investments that are highly realizable

    •        The Fund has sufficient liquidity in cash to meet all on-going expenses and repayments of external borrowings

    •        The directors have the option to reduce dividend payments if the need arises

    The Investment Manager monitors the Fund’s investment portfolio daily and invests in listed securities that can be liquidated in a relatively short period of time. The Board monitors the Fund’s portfolio on a quarterly basis.

    Auditor and Audit

    The Auditor was first appointed on 1 October 2020 following a detailed tender process and the Auditor is subject to annual reappointment by shareholders at each Company AGM and Cell AGM. The Audit Committee considers the nature, scope and results of the Auditor’s work and monitors the independence of the Auditor. Formal reports are received at Board meetings from the Auditor on an interim and annual basis relating to the extent of their work. The work of the Auditor in respect of any significant audit issues and consideration of the adequacy of that work is discussed. The Audit Committee is pleased to report there have been no concerns regarding their performance or independence.

    The Audit Committee assesses the effectiveness of the audit process. The Audit Committee receives a report from the Auditor which covers the principal matters that have arisen from the audit.

    The Audit Committee meets with the Investment Manager and Administrator to discuss the extent of audit work completed to ensure all matters of risk are covered and assesses the quality of the draft financial statements prepared by the Administrator and examines the interaction between the Investment Manager and the Auditor to resolve any potential audit issues.

    The Audit Committee has an active involvement and oversight of the preparation of both half yearly and annual financial reports and recommends for the purposes of the production of these financial reports that valuations are prepared by the management team of the Administrator. These valuations are a critical element in the Company’s financial reporting and the Audit Committee questions them thoroughly.

    Ultimate responsibility for reviewing and approving the annual financial report remains with the Board.

    Andrew Zychowski

    Director

    Date: 24 March 2025

    General Shareholder Information

    AIFMD Disclosures

    In accordance with the AIFMD, the AIFM is required to disclose specific information in relation to the following aspects of the Company’s management:

    Leverage and borrowing

    Leverage is defined as any method by which the Company increases its exposure through borrowing or the use of derivatives. ‘Exposure’ is defined in two ways – ‘gross method’ and ‘commitment method’ – and the Company must not exceed maximum exposures under both methods. ‘Gross method’ exposure is calculated as the sum of all positions of the Company (both positive and negative), that is, all eligible assets, liabilities and derivatives, including derivatives held for risk reduction purposes. ‘Commitment method’ exposure is also calculated as the sum of all positions of the Company (both positive and negative), but after netting off derivative and security positions as specified by the Directive.

    For the gross method, the following has been excluded:

    •        the value of any cash and cash equivalents which are highly liquid investments held in the base currency of the AIF that are readily convertible to a known amount of cash, subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value;

    •        that remain in cash or cash equivalent as defined above and where the amounts of that payable are known. The total amount of leverage calculated as at 31 December 2024 is as follows:

    Gross method: 139.35% (31 December 2023: 130.13%)

    Commitment method: 139.35% (31 December 2023: 130.13%)

    Liquidity

    The Investment Manager’s policy is that the Company should normally be close to fully invested (i.e. with liquidity of 5% or less) but this is subject to the need to retain liquidity for the purpose of the efficient management of the Company in accordance with its objectives. There may therefore be occasions when there will be higher levels of liquidity, for example following the issue of shares or the realisation of investments. This policy has been applied consistently throughout the review period and as a result the Investment Manager has not introduced any new arrangements for managing the Company’s liquidity.

    Risk management policy note

    Please refer to note 16, Financial instruments, in the Notes to the financial statements on pages 72 to 76 for risk management policies, where the current risk profile of the Company and the risk management systems employed by the Investment Manager to manage those risks are set out.

    AIFM Remuneration

    A total of 8 staff employed by the AIFM are engaged in managing the Fund. The compensation paid to these beneficiaries during the year under review was £275,000, split roughly equally between fixed and variable compensation. The Fund has no agreement to pay any carried interest to the AIFM.

    General Data Key Investor

    åDocument and Related Data

    The Company has produced an EU Key Information Document (the “KID”), as required by the Packaged Retail and Insurance-Based Investment Products Regulations (the “PRIIPs Regulations”) and a UK KID under the UK’s amended version of the PRIIPs Regulations, together with a European PRIIPs Template and a European MiFID Template, all of which are available on the Company’s website.

    The PRIIPs Regulations require the preparation and publication of the KID. Investors should note that the methodology for calculating the risks, costs and potential returns cited in the KID are prescribed by the PRIIPs Regulations. However, the methodology is considered by many market participants, including the AIC, to be flawed and future risks and returns may not transpire to be as cited in the KID. The Board therefore recommends that investors not make any investment or divestment decision based on the information contained in the KID.

    Non-Mainstream Pooled Investment (‘NMPI’) Status

    The Company currently conducts its affairs to maintain its status as an “excluded security” for the purposes of the FCA’s rules on “non-mainstream pooled investments” and intends to continue to do so. The Fund Shares are therefore excluded from the FCA’s restrictions which apply to non-mainstream pooled investments.

    Performance Details/Share Price Information

    Details of the Company’s share price and the net asset value per Fund Share can be found on the London Stock Exchange’s website. The net asset value is calculated and published daily, on the basis of the bid price of securities at closing.

    Consumer Duty Value Assessment

    Middlefield International Limited (“MIL”), as advisor to Middlefield Canadian Income PCC (“MCT”), has prepared an assessment of fair value based on the FCA’s guidelines which includes consideration of the fund’s relative performance, investment process, costs and charges, quality of service, comparable market rates and economies of scale. Based on this assessment, MIL has concluded that MCT is providing value to its investors. The assessment of value can be found on the website under Other Reports and Filings www.middlefield.co.uk.

    Independent Auditor’s Report

    TO THE MEMBERS OF MIDDLEFIELD CANADIAN INCOME – GBP PC, A CELL OF MIDDLEFIELD CANADIAN INCOME PCC

    Opinion

    We have audited the financial statements of Middlefield Canadian Income – GBP PC (the “Fund”), which comprise the Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December 2024, and the Statement of Comprehensive Income, Statement of Changes in Redeemable Participating Preference Shareholder’s Equity and Statement of Cash Flows for the year then ended, and notes 1 to 22 to the financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and UK-adopted International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’).

    In our opinion the financial statements of Middlefield Canadian Income – GBP PC, a cell of Middlefield Canadian Income PCC:

    give a true and fair view of the state of the Fund’s affairs as at 31 December 2024 and of its profit for the year then ended;

    have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted IFRS; and

    have been prepared in accordance with the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991.

    Separate opinion in relation to IFRS as adopted by the European Union

    As explained in note 2a, in addition to complying with the Listing Rules obligation to apply UK-adopted IFRS, the Fund has also applied IFRSs as adopted by the European Union.

    In our opinion the financial statements give a true and fair view of the financial position of the Fund as at 31 December 2024 and of its financial performance and cash flows for the year then ended in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the European Union.

    Basis for opinion

    We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (‘ISAs (UK)’) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. We are independent of the Fund in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in Jersey, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

    Our approach to the audit

    Our audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Fund and its environment, including internal control, and assessing the risks of material misstatement. Audit work to respond to the risks of material misstatement was performed directly by the audit engagement team.

    Our consideration of the control environment

    The Fund has appointed JTC Fund Solution (Jersey) Limited to provide the accounting function. The accounting function has been subcontracted to JTC Fund Solutions (RSA) Pty Ltd (“JTC SA”). We have obtained JTC SA’s ISAE 3402 controls assurance report for the period 1 April 2023 to 31 March 2024 which summarises the suitability of design and implementation and operating effectiveness of controls. We have reviewed the report and considered the controls relevant to the accounting functions undertaken by JTC SA for the Fund in order to rely on controls. As the reporting date of the Fund is 31 December 2024, we have obtained correspondence issued by JTC SA confirming that there have not been any material changes to the internal control environment nor any material deficiencies in the internal controls to this date.

    Key audit matters

    Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by us, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

    In addition to the matter described in the ‘material uncertainty related to going concern’ below, in arriving at our audit opinion, the key audit matter was as follows:

    Key Audit Matter How our scope addressed this matter

    Ownership and valuation of Securities

    The Fund’s securities (see note 3 and the schedule of securities) are included at fair value of £169,952,944 (2023: £146,643,502). The portfolio is made up of securities actively traded on recognised markets which are measured at fair value based on market prices and other prices determined with reference to observable inputs.

    Although all of the securities are listed and have quoted market pricing data available which is used to value the securities, there is a risk of material misstatement that the securities may be incorrectly valued due to stale prices, low trading volumes or errors reported in third party prices. Where securities are not regularly traded there is a greater risk of material misstatement that the quoted price is not reflective of fair value and this should be taken into consideration in management’s assessment. Valuation has a significant impact on the net asset value of the Fund.

    There is a risk that securities, a record of which is maintained by a third-party custodian, are not directly owned by the Fund.

    Securities are held by the custodian. Ensuring that the custodian records all the securities correctly under the Fund’s name is critical since the investment portfolio represents the principal element of the financial statements, being the single largest asset on the Statement of Financial Position.

    Our procedures on the valuation of securities included:

    understanding the relevant controls around valuation;

    testing 100% of the valuations of securities by agreeing the prices directly to independent third-party sources;

    considering the trading history of securities to determine whether they have been frequently traded, and values at which they have been traded to consider whether the year-end prices are stale.

    Our procedures on ownership of securities included:

    obtaining an understanding of the relevant controls around custody of securities;

    agreeing the holdings to independent third-party confirmations provided by the Fund’s custodian;

    reviewing the ISAE 3402 controls assurance report of the custodian to consider the controls relevant to the custodial function.

    Key observations
    Based on the procedures, we concluded that the ownership and valuation of securities are appropriate.

    Our application of materiality

    We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that makes it probable that the economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work.

    Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

    Materiality £2,870,000 (2023: £2,470,000).

    Basis for determining materiality – Approximately 1.6% of the Fund’s total assets (2023: 1.6%).

    Rationale for the benchmark applied – The reason for using total assets is that the key users of the financial statements are primarily focused on the valuation of the Fund’s assets. This approach remains consistent with the prior year.

    Performance materiality

    We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceed the materiality for the financial statements as a whole. Performance materiality was set at 75% of materiality for the 2024 audit (2023: 75%). In determining performance materiality, we considered our understanding of the entity, including our assessment of the overall control environment.

    Independent Auditor’s Report continued

    Our application of materiality (continued)

    Error reporting threshold

    We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them all audit differences in excess of £140,000 (2023: £120,000), as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the overall presentation of the financial statements.

    Material uncertainty relating to going concern

    We draw attention to note 2n to the financial statements which indicates that the Fund’s ability to continue as a going concern is dependent on the outcome of the directors review of a number of strategic options for the future of the Fund, as described in note 2n. As stated in note 2n, these events presented by the directors indicate that a material uncertainty exists that may cast significant doubt on the Fund’s ability to continue as a going concern. Our opinion is not qualified in respect of this matter.

    Given the material uncertainty identified by the directors, we considered going concern to be a key audit matter.

    In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.

    Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the Fund’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting, and in response to the key audit matter, included:

    Considering the appropriateness of the directors’ conclusion in relation to the matters described in 2n and discussing this with the board;

    Review of the directors’ statement in note 2n and their identification of any material uncertainties to the Fund’s ability to continue over a period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements;

    Consideration as part of our risk assessment of the nature of the Fund, its business model and related risks including where relevant the requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework and the system of internal control; and

    Evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the Fund’s ability to continue as a going concern, including challenging the underlying data and key assumptions used to make the assessment, and evaluation of the directors’ plans for future actions in relation to their going concern assessment.

    Other than the above, based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties, other than as disclosed in note 2n, relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Fund’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements.

    In relation to the Fund’s reporting on how it has applied Listing Rule 6.6.6R and Listing rule 11.7.7R, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to the director’ statement in the financial statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.

    Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report.

    Other information

    The other information comprises the information included in the annual report, other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report. Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether there is a material misstatement in the financial statements or a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.

    We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

    Independent Auditor’s Report continued

    Matters on which we are required to report by exception

    We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion;

    adequate accounting records have not been kept; or

    the financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

    proper returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or

    we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

    Corporate governance statement

    The Listing Rules require us to review the directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Fund’s compliance with the provisions of the Listing Rule 6.6.6R specified for our review.

    Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the Corporate Governance Statement and Corporate Information is materially consistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained during the audit:

    Directors’ statement with regards the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of accounting and any material uncertainties identified set out on pages 33 to 34;

    Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the entity’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the period is appropriate set out on pages 33 to 34;

    Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 48;

    Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks set out on pages 30 to 34;

    The section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems set out on page 48; and

    The section describing the work of the audit committee set out on pages 48 to 50.

    Responsibilities of directors

    As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

    In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the Fund’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the Fund or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

    Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements

    Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

    Independent Auditor’s Report continued

    Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements (continued)

    As part of an audit in accordance with ISAs (UK), we exercise professional judgement and maintain professional scepticism throughout the audit. We also:

    Identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to fraud or error, design and perform audit procedures responsive to those risks, and obtain audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than the one resulting from error, as fraud may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal control.

    Obtain an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Fund’s internal control.

    Evaluate the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates and related disclosures made by the directors.

    Conclude on the appropriateness of the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting and, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the Fund’s ability to continue as a going concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in our auditors’ report to the related disclosures in the financial statements or, if such disclosures are inadequate, to modify our opinion. Our conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up to the date of our auditors’ report. However, future events or conditions may cause the Fund to cease to continue as a going concern.

    Evaluate the overall presentation, structure and content of the financial statements, including the disclosures, and whether the financial statements represent the underlying transactions and events in a manner that achieves fair presentation.

    We communicate with those charged with governance regarding, among other matters, the planned scope and timing of the audit and significant audit findings, including any significant deficiencies in internal control that we identify during our audit.

    The extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud

    Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is explained below.

    The objectives of our audit are to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance with laws and regulations that have a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, to perform audit procedures to help identify instances of non-compliance with other laws and regulations that may have a material effect on the financial statements, and to respond appropriately to identified or suspected non-compliance with laws and regulations identified during the audit.

    In relation to fraud, the objectives of our audit are to identify and assess the risk of material misstatement of the financial statements due to fraud, to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the assessed risks of material misstatement due to fraud through designing and implementing appropriate responses and to respond appropriately to fraud or suspected fraud identified during the audit.

    However, it is the primary responsibility of management, with the oversight of those charged with governance, to ensure that the entity’s operations are conducted in accordance with the provisions of laws and regulations and for the prevention and detection of fraud.

    In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud, we:

    obtained an understanding of the nature of the industry and sector, including the legal and regulatory frameworks that the Fund operates in and how the Fund is complying with the legal and regulatory frameworks;

    inquired of management, and those charged with governance, about their own identification and assessment of the risks of irregularities, including any known actual, suspected, or alleged instances of fraud;

    discussed matters about non-compliance with laws and regulations and how fraud might occur including assessment of how and where the financial statements may be susceptible to fraud having obtained an understanding of the effectiveness of the control environment; and

    reviewed minutes of the Board and other Committees.

    Independent Auditor’s Report continued

    The extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud (continued)

    We also obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that the Fund operates in, focusing on provisions of those laws and regulations that had a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. The key laws and regulations we considered in this context included UK-adopted IFRS, Companies (Jersey) Law 1991, Codes of Practice for Certified Funds, Listing and Disclosure Transparency Rules and the AIC Code of Corporate Governance. The audit procedures performed included:

    a review of the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation;

    completion of disclosure checklists to identify areas of non-compliance; and

    review of the financial statement disclosures by a specialist in the Listing and Disclosure Transparency Rules.

    The area that we identified as being susceptible to material misstatement due to fraud was management override of controls. The audit procedures performed included:

    testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments;

    undertaking analytical procedures to identify unusual or unexpected relationships;

    assessing whether the judgements made in determining accounting estimates, in particular in respect of the fair value of securities and the split between capital and revenue, are indicative of a potential bias; and

    evaluation of the business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or outside the normal course of business.

    Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit there is an unavoidable risk that some material misstatement of the financial statements may not be detected, even though the audit is properly planned and performed in accordance with ISAs (UK). However, the principal responsibility for ensuring that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error, rests with the directors who should not rely on the audit to discharge those functions.

    In addition, as with any audit, there remains a higher risk of non-detection of fraud, as this may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect material misstatement. We are not responsible for preventing non-compliance or fraud and cannot be expected to detect non-compliance with all laws and regulations.

    Other matters which we are required to address

    Following the recommendation of the audit committee, we were appointed by the Board of directors on 1 October 2020 to audit the financial statements for the year ending 31 December 2020 and subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is 5 years, covering the years ended 31 December 2020 to 2024.

    No non-audit services have been provided to the Fund and we remain independent of the Fund in conducting our audit.

    Our audit opinion is consistent with our reporting to the audit committee we are required to provide in accordance with ISAs (UK).

    Use of our report

    This report is made solely to the Fund’s members, as a body, in accordance with Article 113A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Fund’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Fund and the Fund’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

    Philip Crosby

    For & on behalf of

    RSM Channel Islands (Audit) Limited

    Chartered Accountants and Recognized Auditors

    Jersey, C.I.

    Date: 24 March 2025

    Financial Statements

    Statement of Financial Position of the Fund

    As at 31 December 2024

      Notes 2024
    GBP
    2023
    GBP
    Current assets      
    Securities (at fair value through profit or loss) 3 & 22 169,952,944 146,643,502
    Accrued dividend income   743,674 632,412
    Prepayments   20,324 21,787
    Cash and cash equivalents         4 1,345,531 4,433,118
        172,062,473 151,730,819
    Current liabilities      
    Other payables and accruals         5 (434,929) (388,493)
    Interest payable           (48,282) (71,270)
    Loan payable         14 (28,884,872) (21,831,966)
        (29,368,083) (22,291,729)
    Net assets   142,694,390 129,439,090
    Equity attributable to equity holders      
    Stated capital         6 49,661,314 49,704,414
    Retained earnings   93,033,076 79,734,676
    Total Shareholders’ equity           142,694,390 129,439,090
    Net asset value per redeemable participating preference share (pence) 7 134.05 121.55

    The financial statements and notes on pages 60 to 80 were approved by the directors on 24 March 2025 and signed on behalf of the Board by:

    Michael Phair        Andrew Zychowski

    Director        Director

    The accompanying notes on pages 64 to 80 form an integral part of these financial statements.

    Statement of Comprehensive Income of the Fund

    For the year ended 31 December 2024

      Notes Revenue
    GBP
    Capital
    GBP
    2024
    Total
    GBP
    2023
    Total
    GBP
    Revenue          
    Dividend income 8 9,017,257 9,017,257 9,004,249
    Interest income 8 85,246 85,246 91,389
    Net movement in the fair value of securities (at fair value through profit or loss) 9 12,852,158 12,852,158 (6,799,595)
    Net movement on foreign exchange   1,579,028 1,579,028 698,809
    Total revenue   9,102,503 14,431,186 23,533,689 2,994,852
    Expenditure          
    Investment management fees 2o 375,146 562,719 937,865 916,770
    Custodian fees 2l 16,316 16,316 15,323
    Corporate Broker’s fees 2m 67,175 67,175 65,483
    Directors’ fees and expenses   146,631 146,631 154,809
    Legal and professional fees   11,697 11,697 6,558
    Audit fees   39,000 39,000 39,000
    Tax fees           6,948 6,948 7,560
    Registrar’s fees   49,496 49,496 44,779
    Administration and secretarial fees 2k 133,981 133,981 130,967
    General expenses   160,156 160,156 190,771
    Investor relations fee 2u 173,211 173,211 170,748
    Operating expenses   1,179,757 562,719 1,742,476 1,742,768
    Net operating profit before finance costs   7,922,746 13,868,467 21,791,213 1,252,084
    Finance costs 2r (602,287) (903,431) (1,505,718) (1,570,018)
    Profit/(loss) before tax   7,320,459 12,965,036 20,285,495 (317,934)
    Withholding tax expense 12 (1,343,801) (1,343,801) (1,341,655)
    Net profit/(loss) after taxation   5,976,658 12,965,036 18,941,694 (1,659,589)
    Profit/(loss) per redeemable participating preference share – basic and diluted (pence)         10 5.61 12.18 17.79 (1.56)

    The total column of this statement represents the Fund’s Statement of Comprehensive Income, prepared in accordance with UK- adopted IFRS. There are no items of other comprehensive income, therefore net profit/(loss) after taxation is the total comprehensive income. The supplementary revenue and capital columns are both prepared in accordance with the Statement of Recommended Practice issued by the AIC as disclosed in note 2a. All items in the above statement derive from continuing operations. No operations were acquired or discontinued in the year.

    There are £nil (2023: £nil) earnings attributable to the management shares.

    The accompanying notes on pages 64 to 80 form an integral part of these financial statements.

    Statement of Changes in Redeemable Participating Preference Shareholders’ Equity of the Fund

    For the year ended 31 December 2024

      Notes Stated Capital
    Account
    GBP
    Retained
    Income
    GBP
    Total
    GBP
    At 1 January 2023   49,704,414 86,931,602 136,636,016
    Loss for the year   (1,659,589) (1,659,589)
    Dividends 11 (5,537,337) (5,537,337)
    At 31 December 2023   49,704,414 79,734,676 129,439,090
    Buyback of shares during year 6 (43,100) (43,100)
    Profit for the year   18,941,694 18,941,694
    Dividends 11 (5,643,294) (5,643,294)
    At 31 December 2024   49,661,314 93,033,076 142,694,390

    The accompanying notes on pages 64 to 80 form an integral part of these financial statements.

    Statement of Cash Flows of the Fund

    For the year ended 31 December 2024

               2024 2023
             Notes GBP GBP
    Cash flows from operating activities      
    Net profit/(loss) after taxation           18,941,694 (1,659,589)
    Adjustments for:      
    Net movement in the fair value of securities (at fair value through profit or loss)         9 (12,852,158) 6,799,595
    Realised gains on foreign exchange         2p (1,401,441) (1,345,395)
    Unrealised (gains)/losses on foreign exchange         2p (177,587) 646,586
    Payment for purchases of securities           (64,019,103) (46,058,637)
    Proceeds from sale of securities           53,561,820 55,587,931
    Operating cash flows before movements in working capital           (5,946,775) 13,970,491
    Increase in receivables           (109,799) (24,452)
    Increase/(decrease) in payables and accruals           23,448 (152,089)
    Net generated (used in)/from operating activities           (6,033,126) 13,793,950
    Cash flows generated used in financing activities      
    Repayments of borrowings                   (352,730,557) (236,205,147)
    Buyback of shares          6 (43,100)
    New bank loans raised           361,474,806 230,999,895
    Dividends paid         11 (5,643,294) (5,537,337)
    Net cash generated from/(used in) financing activities           3,057,855 (10,742,589)
    Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents           (2,975,271) 3,051,361
    Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year           4,433,118 1,523,392
    Effect of foreign exchange rate changes           (112,316) (141,635)
    Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year           1,345,531 4,433,118
    Cash and cash equivalents made up of:      
    Cash at bank         4 1,345,531 4,433,118

    The accompanying notes on pages 64 to 80 form an integral part of these financial statements.

    Notes to the Financial Statements of the Fund

    For the year ended 31 December 2024

    1.        General Information

    The Company is a closed-ended investment company incorporated in Jersey on 24 May 2006 and is regulated for Financial Services Business by the JFSC. The Company has one closed-ended cell, Middlefield Canadian Income – GBP PC, also referred to as the “Fund”. The Fund seeks to provide shareholders with a high level of dividends as well as capital growth over the longer term. The Fund intends to pay dividends on a quarterly basis each year. The Fund seeks to achieve its investment objective by investing predominantly in the securities of companies and REITs domiciled in Canada and the U.S. that the Investment Manager believes will provide an attractive level of distributions, together with the prospect for capital growth. In 2015, shareholders also approved an amendment to the Investment Policy to increase the percentage of the value of portfolio assets which may be invested in securities listed on recognised stock exchanges outside Canada to up to 40 per cent.

    The address of the Company’s registered office is 28 Esplanade, St. Helier, Jersey JE2 3QA, Channel Islands.

    The Fund’s shares have been admitted to the Official List of the FCA and to trading on the London Stock Exchange’s Main Market for listed securities.

    The Company and Fund have no employees.

    The functional and presentational currency of the Company and the Fund is Pounds Sterling (‘GBP’) as the Fund is trading on the London Stock Exchange’s Main Market.

    2.        Summary of Material Accounting Policy Information

    a.        Basis of preparation

    The financial statements of the Fund have been prepared on the historical cost basis, except for the measurement at fair value of investments and derivatives, and in accordance with UK-adopted IFRS and interpretations issued by the IFRSIC. The preparation of the Financial Statements in conformity with IFRS requires the directors to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the Financial Statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting year. Although these estimates are based on management’s best knowledge of current events and actions, actual results may ultimately differ from those estimates.

    Where presentational guidance set out in the SORP Financial Statements of Investment Trust Companies and Venture Capital Trusts (July 2022) issued by the AIC is consistent with the requirements of IFRS, the directors have prepared the Financial Statements on a basis compliant with the recommendations of the SORP. The supplementary information which analyses the Statement of Comprehensive Income between items of a revenue and a capital nature is presented in accordance with the SORP.

    The financial statements are prepared in accordance with UK-adopted IFRS as required by the UK Listing and the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules. Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 prescribes which generally accepted accounting principles are allowed to be adopted by Jersey market traded companies in the preparation of their annual financial statements.

    Critical accounting estimates and judgements

    The preparation of the Financial Statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires management to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the accounting policies.

    The following are the critical judgements that the directors have made in the process of applying the accounting policies that have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in the financial statements.

    Expenses have been charged to the Statement of Comprehensive Income and shown in the revenue column. Management fees and finance costs have been allocated 60% to capital and 40% to revenue. This is in accordance with the Board’s expected long-term split of returns, in the form of capital gains and income respectively, from the investment portfolio.

    There were no judgements made in relation to the fair value of the investments, as all investments are quoted.

    Adoption of new standards and amendments

    The following amendments to existing standards that are effective for the first time for the financial period beginning 1 January 2024 that have had an immaterial impact on the Company and the Fund:

    Disclosure of Accounting Policies (Amendments to IAS 1 and IFRS Practice Statement 2)

    The Company has adopted the amendments to IAS 1 for the first time in the current period. The amendments change the requirements in IAS 1 regarding disclosure of accounting policies. The amendments replace all instances of the term ‘significant accounting policies’ with ‘material accounting policy information’. Accounting policy information is material if, when considered together with other information included in an entity’s financial statements, it can reasonably be expected to influence decisions that the primary users of general purpose financial statements make on the basis of those financial statements.

    The supporting paragraphs in IAS 1 are also amended to clarify that accounting policy information that relates to immaterial transactions, other events or conditions is immaterial and need not be disclosed. Accounting policy information may be material because of the nature of the related transactions, other events or conditions, even if the amounts are immaterial. However, not all accounting policy information relating to material transactions, other events or conditions is itself material.

    The IASB has also developed guidance and examples to explain and demonstrate the application of the ‘four-step materiality process’ described in IFRS Practice Statement 2.

    Amendments to IAS 1 Classification of Liabilities as Current or Non-current

    The group has adopted the amendments to IAS 1, published in January 2020, for the first time in the current year.

    The amendments affect only the presentation of liabilities as current or non-current in the statement of financial position and not the amount or timing of recognition of any asset, liability, income or expenses, or the information disclosed about those items.

    The amendments clarify that the classification of liabilities as current or non-current is based on rights that are in existence at the end of the reporting period, specify that classification is unaffected by expectations about whether an entity will exercise its right to defer settlement of a liability, explain that rights are in existence if covenants are complied with at the end of the reporting period, and introduce a definition of ‘settlement’ to make clear that settlement refers to the transfer to the counterparty of cash, equity instruments, other assets or services.

    Amendments to IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements Non-current Liabilities with Covenants

    The group has adopted the amendments to IAS 1, published in November 2022, for the first time in the current year. The amendments specify that only covenants that an entity is required to comply with on or before the end of the reporting period affect the entity’s right to defer settlement of a liability for at least twelve months after the reporting date (and therefore must be considered in assessing the classification of the liability as current or non-current). Such covenants affect whether the right exists at the end of the reporting period, even if compliance with the covenant is assessed only after the reporting date (e.g. a covenant based on the entity’s financial position at the reporting date that is assessed for compliance only after the reporting date). The IASB also specifies that the right to defer settlement of a liability for at least twelve months after the reporting date is not affected if an entity only has to comply with a covenant after the reporting period. However, if the entity’s right to defer settlement of a liability is subject to the entity complying with covenants within twelve months after the reporting period, an entity discloses information that enables users of financial statements to understand the risk of the liabilities becoming repayable within twelve months after the reporting period. This would include information about the covenants (including the nature of the covenants and when the entity is required to comply with them), the carrying amount of related liabilities and facts and circumstances, if any, that indicate that the entity may have difficulties complying with the covenants.

    The Company has adopted the amendments to IAS 8 for the first time in the current year. The amendments replace the definition of a change in accounting estimates with a definition of accounting estimates. Under the new definition, accounting estimates are “monetary amounts in financial statements that are subject to measurement uncertainty”. The definition of a change in accounting estimates was deleted.

    There are no other standards, interpretations or amendments to the existing standards that are not yet effective that would be expected to have a significant impact on the Company.

    New standards and interpretations not yet effective and have not been adopted early by the Company

    •        Amendments to IAS 21, ‘The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates: Lack of exchangeability’. (effective periods commencing on or after 1 January 2025 for IFRS).

    •        Amendments to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 ‘Amendments to the Classification and Measurement of Financial Instruments’. (effective periods commencing on or after 1 January 2026 for IFRS).

    •        IFRS 18 ‘Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements’. (effective periods commencing on or after 1 January 2027 for IFRS).

    There are no other standards, interpretations or amendments to existing standards that are not yet effective that would be expected to have a significant impact on the Company.

    b.        Financial instruments

    Financial instruments carried on the Statement of Financial Position include securities, accrued dividend income, cash at bank, loan payable, other payables and accruals. The particular recognition methods adopted are disclosed in the individual policy statements associated with each item.

    Disclosures about financial instruments to which the Fund is a party are provided in Note 16.

    c.        Securities

    Investments in listed securities have been classified as fair value through profit or loss securities and are those securities intended to be held for a short period of time but which may be sold in response to needs for liquidity or changes in interest rates. These are held at fair value through profit or loss, as they are managed and the performance evaluated on a fair value basis.

    Fair value through profit or loss securities are initially recognised as at fair value, which is taken to be the cost. The securities are subsequently re-measured at fair value based on quoted bid prices on the stock exchange at the reporting date. Gains and losses arising from changes in the fair value of these securities are recognised in profit or loss as they arise.

    All purchases and sales of investments and trading securities that require delivery within the time frame established by regulation or market convention (“regular way” purchases and sales) are recognised at the trade date, which is the date on which the Fund commits to purchase or sell the asset. In cases which are not within the time frame established by regulation or market convention, such transactions are recognised on the settlement date. Any change in fair value of the asset to be received is recognised between the trade date and the settlement date.

    d.        Receivables

    Trade and other receivables are recognised when the Fund becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the receivables. They are measured, at initial recognition, at fair value plus transaction costs, if any. They are subsequently measured at amortised cost. The amortised cost is the amount recognised on the receivable initially, minus principal repayments, plus cumulative amortisation (interest) using the effective interest method (except for short term receivables where the recognition of interest would be immaterial) of any difference between the initial amount and the maturity amount, adjusted for any loss allowance.

    e.        Cash and cash equivalents

    Cash includes amounts held in interest bearing accounts. Cash and cash equivalents comprise bank balances and cash held by the Fund. The carrying value of these assets approximates their fair value.

    f.        Prepayments

    Prepayments comprise amounts paid in advance including, but not limited to, payments for insurance, listing fees and AIC membership fees. Payments are expensed to the Statement of Comprehensive Income over the period for which the Fund is receiving the benefit of these expenditures.

    g.        Provisions

    A provision is recognised when the Fund has a legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event, and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligations.

    h.        Share capital

    Redeemable participating preference shares are only redeemable at the sole option of the directors, participate in the net income of the Fund during its life and are classified as equity in line with IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation (see Note 6). Buyback shares are measured at cost and deducted from equity. Transaction costs relating to buyback shares do not form part of cost of the buyback shares.

    i.        Net asset value per redeemable participating preference share

    The NAV per redeemable participating preference share is calculated by dividing the net assets attributable to redeemable participating preference shareholders included in the Statement of Financial Position by the number of redeemable participating preference shares in issue at the year end.

    j.        Issue costs

    The expenditure directly attributable to the launch of the Fund’s shares and all other costs incurred on the launch and subsequent issues of the Fund’s shares are written off immediately against proceeds raised.

    k.        Administration and secretarial fees

    Under the provisions of the Administration Agreement dated 18 August 2011 between the Fund and JTC Fund Solutions (Jersey) Limited as Administrator, the Administrator is entitled to a fee for administrative and secretarial services payable by the Fund quarterly in arrears at a rate of 0.10 per cent. per annum of the average NAV of the Fund calculated over the relevant quarterly period.

    l.        Custodian fees

    The Custodian was appointed as Custodian of the Fund’s assets on 6 October 2011. The Fund pays the Custodian 0.01 per cent. per annum of the Fund’s NAV, accrued for at each valuation date.

    m.        Corporate Broker’s fees

    The Fund pays the Corporate Broker quarterly in arrears at a rate of 0.05 per cent. per annum of the average NAV of the Fund calculated over the relevant period.

    n.        Going concern

    In the opinion of the directors, the Company and the Fund have adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future being at least the next twelve months from the approval of these financial statements. For this reason, the Financial Statements have been prepared using the going concern basis.

    The directors considered, inter alia, the following factors:

    •        ongoing shareholder interest in the continuation of the Fund;

    •        the Fund has sufficient liquidity in the form of cash assets to meet all on-going expenses;

    •        should the need arise, the directors have the option to reduce dividend payments in order to positively affect the Fund’s cash flows; and

    •        the Fund’s investments in Canadian and U.S. securities are readily realisable to meet liquidity requirements, if necessary.

    The directors appreciate the severity of the current economic environment and continue to assess, in conjunction with the Investment Manager and the Investment Advisor, the situation and how it may impact the Company in the short and long term. The directors consider the Company to be well placed to withstand any significant adverse shocks and assume the going concern basis to be appropriate.

    The accompanying financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, which assumes the Company will continue to operate and meet its obligations as they fall due. However, the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern is subject to material uncertainty.

    Since the Company’s year end, on 10 February 2025 the Company, together with three other UK-listed closed-end funds, received a requisition notice from Saba, marking the second phase of Saba’s recent activist campaign in the UK-listed closed-end fund sector. The first phase commenced on 18 December 2024 with Saba requisitioning general meetings at seven UK-listed closed-end funds, proposing resolutions (each of which later failed) to remove the current independent directors of those seven funds and replace them with Saba’s own appointees, with a view to also terminating the management contracts and, in due course, replacing the investment managers with Saba.

    The requisition notice received by the Company on 10 February 2025 was for the approval by shareholders of the taking of all necessary steps to implement a scheme or process by which shareholders would become (or have the option to become) shareholders of a UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle) implementing a substantially similar strategy to the Company. Such scheme or process could entail shareholders rolling into an existing or newly established UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle), in either case managed by the Company’s existing investment manager or one of its affiliates.

    Following consultation with a number of the Company’s largest shareholders including Saba, and following constructive discussions with Saba, on 21 February 2025 the Company announced that Saba had agreed to withdraw its requisition notice for a period of 60 days to enable the Company and its advisers to formulate proposals that are in the best interests of all shareholders.

    At the current time, the Board is in the process of considering a number of strategic options in the best interests of shareholders as a whole. A further announcement regarding future proposals which the Company may put to shareholders will be made in due course. Although the Board is confident that the Company will have sufficient financial resources to meet its obligations due within twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements, the uncertain future outcome of the Board’s deliberations indicates the existence of a material uncertainty that may cast significant doubt on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern. Nevertheless, the Board believes that it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.

    o.        Investment management fees

    The Investment Manager is entitled to a management fee payable by the Fund quarterly in arrears at a rate of 0.70 per cent. per annum of the average NAV of the Fund calculated over the relevant quarterly period.

    Investment management fees for the year ended 31 December 2024 total £937,865 (31 December 2023: £916,770). The fee is split between the Investment Manager and the Investment Advisor at a ratio of 0.60 per cent: 0.10 per cent of the 0.70 per cent fee.

    Investment management fees have been split 60% to capital and 40% to revenue (see note 2a for further details regarding the allocation of the management fees).

    p.        Foreign currency translation

    Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into Pound Sterling at exchange rates in effect at the reporting date. Realised and unrealised gains and losses on foreign currency transactions are charged or credited to the Statement of Comprehensive Income as foreign currency gains and losses. The cost of investments, and income and expenditure are translated into Pound Sterling based on exchange rates on the date of the transaction. Realised gains on foreign exchange currency transactions totalled £1,401,441 for the year (2023: gains of £1,309,333). Realised gains on forward exchange contracts totalled £ nil (2023: gains of £36,062). Unrealised gains on foreign currency translations totalled £177,587 (2023: losses of £646,586).

    q.        Revenue recognition

    Dividend income arises from equity investments held and is recognised on the date investments are marked ‘ex-dividend’. Where the Company elects to receive dividends in the form of additional shares rather than cash, the equivalent to the cash dividend is recognised as income in revenue and any excess in value of the shares received over this is recognised in capital. Dividend income is shown gross of withholding tax. Interest income arises from cash and cash equivalents and quoted bonds and is recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive Income using the effective interest method.

    Special dividends are reviewed on a case by case basis in determining whether the dividend is to be treated as revenue or capital. Amounts recognised as revenue will form part of the distributable revenue. Amounts recognised as capital are included in realised gains. The tax accounting treatment follows the treatment of the principal amount.

    r.        Loan payable and finance costs

    Loan payable is initially measured at fair value and is subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. The effective interest rate method is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial liability and of allocating interest expense over the relevant period. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments through the expected life of the financial liability or, where appropriate, a shorter period, to the net carrying amount on initial recognition.

    s.        Related parties

    Related parties are individuals and companies who have the ability, directly or indirectly, to control the other party or exercise significant influence over the other party in making financial and operating decisions (see Note 13).

    t.        Business and geographical segments

    The directors are of the opinion that the Fund is engaged in a single segment of business investing predominantly in securities and REITs domiciled in Canada and the U.S. to which the Fund is solely exposed and therefore no segmental reporting is provided.

    u.        Investor relations fee

    The Investment Advisor and Investment Manager are paid an additional fee for investor relations services totalling as the lesser of 15 basis points of the market value of the Fund or £200,000 per annum, with the fee to be calculated daily based on the closing market value of the Fund and payable quarterly in arrears.

    Investor relations fee for the year ended 31 December 2024 total £173,211 (31 December 2023: £170,748).

    3.        Securities (at fair value through profit and loss)

      2024 2023
      GBP GBP
    Quoted/listed Equities 169,952,944 146,643,502

    Please refer to Note 22 for the Schedule of Investments.

    4.        Cash and cash equivalents

      2024 2023
      GBP GBP
    Cash at bank 1,345,531 4,433,118

    Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash held by the Fund and bank balances with an original maturity of three months or less. The carrying value of these assets approximates their fair value.

    5.        Other payables and accruals

      2024 2023
      GBP GBP
    Investment management fees (Note 13) 254,113 220,372
    Corporate Broker’s fees 18,151 15,741
    Audit fees 39,000 39,000
    Administration fees 36,302 31,481
    General expenses 17,970 22,334
    Registrar’s fees 10,286 9,466
    Tax service fees 6,894 6,840
    Custodian fees 3,560 3,148
    Investor relations fee (Note 13) 48,653 40,111
      434,929 388,493

    6.        Stated capital

    The authorised share capital of the Fund is split into two management shares of no par value and an unlimited number of redeemable participating preference shares of no par value, the latter of which are attributable solely to the Fund.

      No. of shares GBP
    Management shares issued    
    2 management shares of no par value issued at 100.00 pence each 2 2
    At 31 December 2024 and 2023 2 2
    Redeemable participating preference shares issued (excluding shares held in treasury)    
    At 31 December 2023 106,487,250 49,704,412
    28 August 2024, 20,000 shares of no par value repurchased at £ 1.075 each (20,000) (21,500)
    30 August 2024, 20,000 shares of no par value repurchased at £ 1.08 each (20,000) (21,600)
    At 31 December 2024 106,447,250 49,661,312
    Total   49,661,314

    The holders of redeemable participating preference shares are entitled to receive in proportion to their holdings, all of the revenue profits of the Fund (including accumulated revenue reserves).

    Each redeemable participating preference shareholder is entitled to one vote for each share held, provided all amounts payable in respect of that share have been paid.

    Management shares are non-redeemable, have no right in respect of the accrued entitlement, and have no right to participate in the assets of the Fund on a winding-up. In all other respects, the management shares have the same rights and restrictions as redeemable participating preference shares. Each management share entitles the holder to one vote for each share held.

    Redeemable participating preference shares are redeemed at the absolute discretion of the directors. Since redemption is at the discretion of the directors, in accordance with the provisions of IAS 32, the redeemable participating preference shares are classified as equity. The Fund will not give effect to redemption requests in respect of more than 25 per cent. of the shares then in issue, or such lesser percentage as the directors may decide.

    At the year end, there were 18,235,000 (31 December 2023: 18,195,000) treasury shares in issue. Treasury shares have no value and no voting rights.

    FCA regulation of ‘non-mainstream pooled investments’

    On 1 January 2014, the FCA introduced rules relating to the restrictions on the retail distribution of unregulated collective investment schemes and close substitutes (non-mainstream pooled investments). UK investment trusts are excluded from these restrictions, as are other “excluded securities” as defined by the FCA.

    As reported in last year’s annual report, the Board believes that the Company’s shares are “excluded securities” under the FCA’s definitions of such and, as a result, the FCA’s restrictions on retail distribution do not apply. This status is reviewed annually and the Board intends to conduct the Company’s affairs to retain such status for the foreseeable future.

    Retained Earnings

    This reserve records all net gains and losses and transactions with owners not recorded elsewhere. This reserve is available for distribution to the shareholders. Dividends paid to shareholders are recognised directly in this reserve.

    7.        Net asset value per redeemable participating preference share

    The NAV per share of 134.05p (31 December 2023: 121.55p) is based on the net assets at the year end of £142,694,390 (31 December 2023: £129,439,090) and on 106,447,250 redeemable participating preference shares, being the number of redeemable participating preference shares in issue at the year end (31 December 2023: 106,487,250 shares).

    8.        Dividend and interest income

          2024  
      Revenue Capital Total 2023
      GBP GBP GBP GBP
    Interest Income 85,246 85,246 91,389
    Dividend income 9,017,257 9,017,257 9,004,249
      9,102,503 9,102,503 9,095,638

    9.        Net movement in the fair value of securities

          2024  
      Revenue Capital Total 2023
      GBP GBP GBP GBP
    Gains on sale of securities 5,635,000 5,635,000 608,988
    Gains/(losses) on the revaluation of securities at year end 7,217,158 7,217,158 (7,408,583)
    Net movement in the fair value of securities (at fair value through profit or loss) 12,852,158 12,852,158 (6,799,595)

    10.        Profit/(loss) per redeemable participating preference share – basic and diluted

    Basic profit/(loss) per redeemable participating preference share is calculated by dividing the net profit attributable to redeemable participating preference shares of £18,941,694 (31 December 2023: £1,659,589 loss) by the weighted average number of redeemable participating preference shares outstanding during the year of 106,473,698 shares (31 December 2023: 106,487,250 shares). The allocation between revenue and capital can be found on the Statement of Comprehensive Income of the Fund on page 61.

    11.        Dividends

    Dividends of 1.325 pence per share were paid on a quarterly basis during the year in the months of January, April, July and October being 5.3 pence per share for the year and totalling £5,643,294 (31 December 2023: £5,537,337). On 31 January 2025 a dividend of £1,463,650 was paid of 1.375 pence per share. In accordance with the requirements of IFRS, as this was approved on 2 January 2025, being after the reporting date, no accrual was reflected in the 2024 Financial Statements for this amount of £1,463,650 (31 December 2023: £1,410,956).

    Dividends payable in respect of the financial year, which is the basis on which the requirements of Section 1158/1159 of the Corporation Tax Act 2010 are considered (see note 12) comprise the dividends paid in April, July and October of the financial year together with the dividend paid in January following the financial year end. For 2024 these dividends amounted to 5.35 pence per share (for 2023: 5.225 pence per share)

    12.        Taxation

    The Fund is subject to UK corporation tax at a rate of 25% (2023: 19% for three months and 25% for nine months of the year). The Company adopted UK tax residency on 11 October 2011. Since that date the Company has been managed in such a way as to be able to meet the conditions for approval as an investment trust under Section 1158 of the Corporation Tax Act 2010. As an investment trust, all capital gains are exempt from UK corporation tax. On 7 December 2012, the Company received approval from HM Revenue & Customs to be treated as an investment trust in accordance with Section 1158 of the Corporation Tax Act 2010 and will seek to remain so approved.

    The Fund incurred £1,343,801 (2023: £1,341,655) of withholding tax on foreign dividends during the year and this expense has been included in the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

    13.        Related party transactions

    The directors are regarded as related parties and key management personnel. Total directors’ fees earned during the year amounted to £126,000 of which £Nil was due at year end (2023: £125,215 of which £Nil was due at the year end). Each non-executive director, other than Mr. Orrico, earned a fee of £29,000 in respect of the financial year (2023: £29,000), the Chairman earned a fee of £36,000 (2023: £36,000) and the Chairman of the Audit Committee £32,000 (2023: £32,000). Mr Orrico waived any right to charge a fee in 2024 and 2023.

    The directors held an interest in shares and received dividends during the year. Their interest in shares and the dividends received during the year are disclosed within the Directors’ Remuneration Report.

    The Investment Advisor and Investment Manager are also regarded as a related party due to common ownership. Total management fees paid during the year amounted to £937,865 (2023: £916,770), of which £254,113 (2023: £220,372) was outstanding at 31 December 2024.

    The Investment Advisor and Investment Manager are also paid an additional fee for investor relations services. The fee for the year ended 31 December 2024 amounted to £173,211 (31 December 2023: £170,748), of which £48,653 (2023: £40,111) was outstanding at 31 December 2024.

    The fees for the above are all arm’s length transactions.

    14.        Loan payable

    The Fund has a credit facility agreement with RBC whereby RBC provides a credit facility, with a maximum principal amount of the lesser of CAD 75,000,000 and 25 per cent. of the total asset value of the Fund. The credit facility was amended on 3 April, 2024 to replace Banker’s Acceptances with CORRA (Canadian Overnight Repo Rate Average administered and published by the Bank of Canada) loans.

    At 31 December 2024, the amount drawn down under the credit facility was CAD 52,000,000 (GBP equivalent at amortised cost of £28,884,872) (31 December 2023: CAD 37,000,000 (GBP equivalent at amortised cost of £21,831,966)). The loan value of CAD 52,000,000 was made up of three loans as follows:

    Issue date Maturity date Loan amount
    12 December 2024 13 January 2025 CAD10,000,000
    16 December 2024 15 January 2025 CAD10,000,000
    18 December 2024 18 February 2025 CAD32,000,000

    As at 31 December 2024, the interest paid on the Banker’s Acceptance and Term CORRA loans totalled £1,458,822 (year ended 31 December 2023 [Banker’s Acceptance only]: £1,388,175) with £48,282 accrued at year end.

    Interest on Prime Loans is Prime Rate minus 0.35 per cent. In the case of Term CORRA loans, the Term CORRA rate plus 0.60 per cent. per annum is payable.

    15.        Security agreement

    In connection with entry into the credit facility agreement, the Fund has entered into a general security agreement with RBC, pursuant to which the Fund has granted RBC interests in respect of collateral, being all present and future personal property, including the securities portfolio, as security for the Fund’s obligations under the credit facility agreement.

    16.        Financial instruments

    Fair values

    The carrying amounts of the investments, accrued income, other receivables, cash and cash equivalents, loan payable and other payables approximate their fair values.

    Management of capital

    The Investment Manager manages the capital of the Fund in accordance with the Fund’s Investment Objectives and Policy.

    The capital structure of the Fund consists of proceeds from the issue of preference shares, loans and reserve accounts. The Investment Manager manages and adjusts its capital in response to general economic conditions, the risk characteristics of the underlying assets and working capital requirements. Generally speaking, the Fund will reduce leverage when investments are likely to decrease in value and will increase leverage when investment appreciation is anticipated. In order to maintain or adjust its capital structure, the Fund may borrow or repay debt under its Credit Facility or undertake other activities deemed appropriate under the specific circumstances. The Fund and the Company do not have any externally imposed capital requirements. However, the Fund is subject to bank covenants in respect of leverage and complied with those covenants for the whole of both 2024 and 2023.

    Investment and trading activities

    It is intended that the Fund will continue throughout its life to be primarily invested in a Canadian and U.S. equities portfolio. In 2015, the percentage of the value of portfolio assets which may be invested in securities listed on a recognised stock exchange outside Canada was increased to up to 40 per cent. At year end, 4.36% of the portfolio was invested in securities outside of Canada.

    The Fund’s investing activities expose it to various types of risk that are associated with the financial instruments and markets in which it invests. The most important types of financial risk to which the Fund is exposed are market price risk, interest rate risk and currency risk.

    Credit risk

    Credit risk is the risk that an issuer or counterparty may be unable or unwilling to meet a commitment that it has entered into with the Fund.

    The Fund’s principal financial assets are bank balances and cash, other receivables and investments as set out in the Statement of Financial Position which represents the Fund’s maximum exposure to credit risk in relation to the financial assets. The credit risk on bank balances is limited because the counterparties are banks with high credit ratings of A, A- and BBB+ assigned by Standard and Poor’s rating agency. All transactions in listed securities are settled upon delivery using approved brokers.

    The risk of default is considered minimal as delivery of securities sold is only made once the broker has received payment. Payment is made on a purchase once the securities have been received by the broker. The trade will fail if either party fails to meet its obligations. Where the Investment Manager makes an investment in debt or corporate securities, the credit rating of the issuer is taken into account to manage the Company’s exposure to risk of default. Investments in debt or corporate securities are across a variety of sectors and geographical markets, to avoid concentration of credit risk.

    The Fund’s maximum exposure to credit risk is the carrying value of the assets on the Statement of Financial Position.

    Market price risk

    Market price risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in market prices (other than those arising from interest rate risk or currency risk), whether those changes are caused by factors specific to the individual financial instrument or its issuer, or factors affecting similar financial instruments traded in the market. The Fund’s exposure to market price risk is comprised mainly of movements in the value of the Fund’s investments.

    It is the business of the Investment Manager to manage the portfolio and borrowings to achieve the best returns. The directors manage the risk inherent in the portfolio by monitoring, on a formal basis, the Investment Manager’s compliance with the Company’s stated Investment Policy and reviewing investment performance.

    Country risk

    On 17 January 2012, the FRC released “Responding to the increased country and currency risk in financial reports”. This update from the FRC included guidance on responding to the increased country and currency risk as a result of funding pressures on certain European countries, the curtailment of capital spending programs (austerity measures) and regime changes in the Middle East.

    The Fund invests primarily in Canadian and U.S. securities. The Investment Manager monitors the Company’s exposure to foreign currencies on a daily basis. The Board has reviewed the disclosures and believes that no additional disclosures are required because the Canadian and U.S. economies are stable.

    Fair value measurements

    IFRS 13 establishes a fair value hierarchy that prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value. The hierarchy gives the highest priority to unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (Level 1 measurements) and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs (Level 3 measurements). The three levels of the fair value hierarchy under IFRS 13 are as follows:

    •        Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities; or

    •        Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (that is, as prices) or indirectly (that is, derived from prices); or

    •        Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (that is, unobservable inputs).

    The level in the fair value hierarchy within which the fair value measurement is determined on the basis of the lowest level input that is significant to the fair value measurement in its entirety. For this purpose, the significance of an input is assessed against the fair value measurement in its entirety. If a fair value measurement uses observable inputs that require significant adjustment based on unobservable inputs, that measurement is a level 3 measurement. Assessing the significance of a particular input to the fair value measurement in its entirety requires judgment, considering factors specific to the asset or liability.

    The determination of what constitutes ‘observable’ requires significant judgment by the Directors. The Directors consider observable data to be that market data that is readily available, regularly distributed or updated, reliable and verifiable, not proprietary, and provided by independent sources that are actively involved in the relevant market.

    The following tables present the Fund’s financial instruments by level within the valuation hierarchy as of 31 December 2024 and 31 December 2023:

      Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Total
    31 December 2024 GBP GBP GBP GBP
    Financial assets        
    Securities (at fair value through profit or loss) 169,952,944 169,952,944
             
      Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Total
    31 December 2023 GBP GBP GBP GBP
    Financial assets        
    Securities (at fair value through profit or loss) 146,643,502 146,643,502

    The Fund holds securities that are traded in active markets. Such financial instruments are classified as Level 1 of the IFRS 13 fair value hierarchy. There were no transfers between Level 1, 2 and 3 in the year.

    Market Price sensitivity

    At 31 December 2024, if the market prices of the securities had been 30% higher with all other variables held constant, the increase in net assets attributable to holders of redeemable participating preference shares for the year would have been £50,985,883 (2023: £43,993,051) higher, arising due to the increase in the fair value of financial assets at fair value through profit or loss.

    At 31 December 2024, if the market prices of the securities had been 30% lower with all other variables held constant, the decrease in net assets attributable to holders of redeemable shares for the year would have been equal, but opposite, to the figures stated above.

    Interest rate risk

    Interest rate risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in market interest rates.

    The Fund’s interest rate sensitive assets and liabilities mainly comprise cash and cash equivalents, debt securities and loan payable. The cash and cash equivalents are subject to floating rates and are considered to be part of the investment strategy of the Fund. No other hedging is undertaken in respect of this interest rate risk.

    There were no fixed rate assets or liabilities at 31 December 2024 and 31 December 2023.

    The following table details the Fund’s exposure to interest rate risk at 31 December 2024 and 31 December 2023:

      Floating rate assets
      Weighted   Weighted  
      average interest 2024 average interest 2023
      at year end GBP at year end GBP
    Assets        
    Floating rate assets        
    Cash and cash equivalents * 1,345,531 * 4,433,118
        1,345,531   4,433,118

    *        Interest on bank balances is not material to the financial statements and are based on prevailing bank base rates.

      Floating rate liabilities
      2024 2023
      GBP GBP
    Liabilities    
    Floating rate liabilities    
    Loan payable (See Note 14) 28,884,872 21,831,966
      28,884,872 27,831,966

    The above analysis excludes short-term debtors and creditors as all material amounts are non-interest bearing.

    Interest rate sensitivity analysis

    At 31 December 2024, had interest rates been 50 basis points higher and all other variables were held constant, the Company’s net assets attributable to redeemable participating preference shares for the year would have decreased by £137,697 (31 December 2023: £86,994) due to an increase in interest payable on the loan and to a lesser extent an increase in interest earnings on cash and cash equivalents.

    Liquidity risk

    Liquidity risk is the risk that the Fund cannot meet its liabilities as they fall due. The Fund’s primary source of liquidity consists of cash and cash equivalents, securities at fair value through profit or loss and the credit facility.

    The Fund’s investments are considered to be readily realisable, predominantly issued by Canadian and U.S. companies and REITs listed on a Canadian Stock Exchange and actively traded.

    As at 31 December 2024, the Fund’s ability to manage liquidity risk was as follows:

      Less than   3 months to More than  
      1 month 1-3 months 1 year 1 year Total
      GBP GBP GBP GBP GBP
    Assets          
    Securities (at fair value through profit or loss) 169,952,944 169,952,944
    Accrued dividend income 719,453 24,221 743,674
    Cash and cash equivalents 1,345,531 1,345,531
      172,017,928 24,221 172,042,149
    Liabilities          
    Other payables and accruals (434,929) (434,929)
    Interest payable (21,788) (26,494) (48,282)
    Loan payable (11,109,566) (17,775,306) (28,884,872)
      (11,566,283) (17,801,800) (29,368,083)
      160,451,645 (17,777,579) 142,674,066

    As at 31 December 2023, the Fund’s ability to manage liquidity risk was as follows:

      Less than   3 months to More than  
      1 month 1-3 months 1 year 1 year Total
      GBP GBP GBP GBP GBP
    Assets          
    Securities (at fair value through profit or loss) 146,643,502 146,643,502
    Other receivables 557,895 74,517 632,412
    Cash and cash equivalents 4,433,118 4,433,118
      151,634,515 74,517 151,709,032
    Liabilities          
    Other payables and accruals (388,493) (388,493)
    Interest payable (71,270) (71,270)
    Loan payable (21,831,966) (21,831,966)
      (22,291,729) (22,291,729)
      129,342,786 74,517 129,417,303

    Currency risk

    The Fund is denominated in GBP, whereas the Fund’s principal investments are denominated in CAD and USD. Consequently, the Fund is exposed to currency risk. The Fund’s policy is therefore to actively monitor exposure to currency risk. The Board reserves the right to employ currency hedging but, other than in exceptional circumstances, does not intend to hedge. The Board considers that exposure was significant at the year end. The fund does not employ any derivative contracts to hedge against exposure to currency risk in line with the decision of the board of directors.

    The Fund’s net exposure to CAD currency at the year end was as follows:

      2024 2023
      GBP GBP
    Assets    
    Securities (at fair value through profit or loss) 169,952,944 146,643,502
    Cash and cash equivalents 757,724 4,193,885
    Accrued income 743,674 632,412
      171,454,342 151,469,799
      2024 2023
      GBP GBP
    Liabilities    
    Loan payable 28,884,872 21,831,966
    Interest payable 48,282 71,270
    General expenses
      28,933,154 21,903,236

    The Fund’s net exposure to USD currency at the year end was as follows:

      2024 2023
      GBP GBP
    Assets    
    Securities (at fair value through profit or loss)
    Cash and cash equivalents 101,771 82,692
      101,771 82,692

    Sensitivity analysis

    At 31 December 2024, had GBP strengthened against the CAD by 5%, with all other variables held constant, the decrease in net assets attributable to shareholders would amount to approximately £7,126,059 (31 December 2023: £6,478,328). Had GBP weakened against the CAD by 5%, this would amount to an increase in net assets attributable to shareholders of approximately £7,126,059 (31 December 2023: £6,478,328).

    At 31 December 2024, had GBP strengthened against the USD by 5%, with all other variables held constant, the decrease in net assets attributable to shareholders would amount to approximately £5,088 (31 December 2023: £4,135). Had GBP weakened against the USD by 5%, this would amount to an increase in net assets attributable to shareholders of approximately £5,088 (31 December 2023: £4,135).

    17.        Cash Flow statement reconciliation of financing activities

          Non-cash changes  
            Foreign    
      1 January     exchange Fair value 31 December
      2024 Cash flows Acquisition movements changes 2024
      GBP GBP GBP GBP GBP GBP
    Financial liabilities held at amortized cost 21,831,966 8,744,249 (1,691,343) 28,884,872
    Total 21,831,966 8,744,249 (1,691,343) 28,884,872
          Non-cash changes  
            Foreign    
      1 January     exchange Fair value 31 December
      2023 Cash flows Acquisition movements changes 2023
      GBP GBP GBP GBP GBP GBP
    Financial liabilities held at amortized cost 27,877,663 (5,205,252) (840,445) 21,831,966
    Total 27,877,663 (5,205,252) (840,444) 21,831,966

    18.        Post year end events

    On 2 January 2025, the Company declared a quarterly dividend of 1.375 pence per share. The ex-dividend date was 9 January 2025 and the record date was 10 January 2025. On 31 January 2025, the dividend of £1,463,650 was paid.

    No redeemable preference shares were purchased by the Company subsequent to year end.

    The loan of CAD 10,000,000 maturing on 13 January 2025, was renewed with a current maturity date of 14 April 2025.

    The loan of CAD 10,000,000 maturing on 15 January 2025, was renewed with a current maturity date of 14 April 2025.

    The loan of CAD 32,000,000 maturing on 18 February 2025, was renewed with a maturity date of 18 March 2025. On 18 March 2025, CAD 2,000,000 was paid down, and CAD 30,000,000 was renewed with a maturity date of 17 April 2025.

    These loans are expected to be renewed for another 30-60 days upon their respective maturities.

    Since the Company’s year end, on 10 February 2025 the Company, together with three other UK-listed closed-end funds, received a requisition notice from Saba, marking the second phase of Saba’s recent activist campaign in the UK-listed closed-end fund sector. The first phase commenced on 18 December 2024 with Saba requisitioning general meetings at seven UK-listed closed-end funds, proposing resolutions (each of which later failed) to remove the current independent directors of those seven funds and replace them with Saba’s own appointees, with a view to also terminating the management contracts and, in due course, replacing the investment managers with Saba. The requisition notice received by the Fund on 10 February 2025 was for the approval by shareholders of the taking of all necessary steps to implement a scheme or process by which shareholders would become (or have the option to become) shareholders of a UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle) implementing a substantially similar strategy to the Company. Such scheme or process could entail shareholders rolling into an existing or newly established UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle), in either case managed by the Company’s existing investment manager or one of its affiliates. Following consultation with a number of the Company’s largest shareholders including Saba, and following constructive discussions with Saba, on 21 February 2025 the Company announced that Saba had agreed to withdraw its requisition notice for a period of 60 days to enable the Company and its advisers to formulate proposals that are in the best interests of all shareholders. At the current time, the Board is in the process of considering a number of strategic options in the best interests of shareholders as a whole. A further announcement regarding future proposals which the Fund may put to shareholders will be made in due course.

    19.        Controlling party

    In the directors’ opinion there is no ultimate controlling party.

    20.        Contingent Liabilities

    At 31 December 2024 there were no contingent liabilities, guarantees or financial commitments (2023: £nil)

    21.        Going Concern and Material Uncertainty

    The accompanying financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, which assumes the Company will continue to operate and meet its obligations as they fall due. However, the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern is subject to material uncertainty.

    Since the Company’s year end, on 10 February 2025 the Company, together with three other UK-listed closed-end funds, received a requisition notice from Saba, marking the second phase of Saba’s recent activist campaign in the UK-listed closed-end fund sector. The first phase commenced on 18 December 2024 with Saba requisitioning general meetings at seven UK-listed closed-end funds, proposing resolutions (each of which later failed) to remove the current independent directors of those seven funds and replace them with Saba’s own appointees, with a view to also terminating the management contracts and, in due course, replacing the investment managers with Saba.

    The requisition notice received by the Company on 10 February 2025 was for the approval by shareholders of the taking of all necessary steps to implement a scheme or process by which shareholders would become (or have the option to become) shareholders of a UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle) implementing a substantially similar strategy to the Company. Such scheme or process could entail shareholders rolling into an existing or newly established UK-listed open-ended investment company (or similar open-ended investment vehicle), in either case managed by the Company’s existing investment manager or one of its affiliates.

    Following consultation with a number of the Company’s largest shareholders including Saba, and following constructive discussions with Saba, on 21 February 2025 the Company announced that Saba had agreed to withdraw its requisition notice for a period of 60 days to enable the Company and its advisers to formulate proposals that are in the best interests of all shareholders.

    At the current time, the Board is in the process of considering a number of strategic options in the best interests of shareholders as a whole. A further announcement regarding future proposals which the Company may put to shareholders will be made in due course. Although the Board is confident that the Company will have sufficient financial resources to meet its obligations due within twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements, the uncertain future outcome of the Board’s deliberations indicates the existence of a material uncertainty that may cast significant doubt on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern. Nevertheless, the Board believes that it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.

    22.        Schedule of Investments – Securities (at fair value through profit or loss)

    As at 31 December 2024

          Bid-Market    
        Book Cost Value % of % of
    Description Shares/Units GBP GBP Net Assets Portfolio
    Equities          
    Bermuda – Quoted Investments 4.36%          
    (2023: 0%)          
    Utilities:          
    Brookfield Infrastructure          
    Partners L.P. 180,000 4,337,056 4,523,371 3.17% 2.66%
    Brookfield Renewable Partners L.P. 160,000 3,079,282 2,890,265 2.03% 1.70%
        7,416,338 7,413,636 5.20% 4.36%
    Canada – Quoted Investments 95.64%          
    (2023: 100%)          
    Materials:          
    Nutrien Ltd. 135,000 5,334,935 4,814,331 3.37% 2.83%
    Energy:          
    ARC Resources Ltd. 160,000 2,043,557 2,311,679 1.62% 1.36%
    Canadian Natural Resources Ltd. 265,000 3,505,545 6,521,038 4.57% 3.84%
    Cenovus Energy Inc. 140,000 1,724,436 1,694,542 1.19% 1.00%
    Paramount Resources Ltd. 160,000 2,419,480 2,812,942 1.97% 1.66%
    Parkland Corporation 120,000 2,301,990 2,164,366 1.52% 1.27%
    Peyto Exploration & Development Corp. 365,000 2,684,145 3,467,018 2.43% 2.04%
    Suncor Energy Inc. 100,000 2,432,647 2,844,049 1.99% 1.67%
    Topaz Energy Corp. 315,000 2,923,886 4,852,075 3.40% 2.85%
    Tourmaline Oil Corp. 220,000 8,765,732 8,103,429 5.68% 4.77%
    Whitecap Resources Inc. 575,000 3,149,422 3,251,492 2.28% 1.91%
        31,950,840 38,022,630 26.65% 22.37%
    Financials:          
    AGF Management Limited Class B 975,000 4,654,905 5,762,532 4.04% 3.39%
    Bank of Montreal 85,000 5,280,172 6,576,197 4.61% 3.87%
    Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce 115,000 3,533,767 5,794,555 4.06% 3.41%
    Manulife Financial Corporation 235,000 3,183,396 5,759,310 4.04% 3.39%
    National Bank of Canada 45,000 2,113,561 3,269,295 2.29% 1.92%
    Power Corporation of Canada 155,000 3,483,393 3,852,936 2.70% 2.27%
    Royal Bank of Canada 65,000 4,915,407 6,256,102 4.38% 3.68%
    The Bank of Nova Scotia 105,000 4,189,715 4,499,791 3.15% 2.65%
    The Toronto-Dominion Bank 108,000 4,803,184 4,591,162 3.22% 2.70%
        36,157,500 46,361,880 32.49% 27.28%
    Pipelines:          
    Enbridge Inc. 235,000 6,421,061 7,956,255 5.58% 4.68%
    Gibson Energy Inc. 385,000 5,489,785 5,220,302 3.66% 3.07%
    Keyera Corp. 150,000 1,980,830 3,648,659 2.56% 2.15%
    Pembina Pipeline Corporation 180,000 3,827,050 5,310,262 3.72% 3.12%
    South Bow Corporation 35,000 516,704 658,492 0.46% 0.39%
    TC Energy Corporation 160,000 4,921,769 5,941,396 4.16% 3.50%
        23,157,199 28,735,366 20.14% 16.91%
    Power and Utilities:          
    Alta gas Ltd. 200,000 2,877,589 3,711,706 2.60% 2.18%
    Capital Power Corporation 140,000 2,463,033 4,943,646 3.46% 2.91%
        5,340,622 8,655,352 6.06% 5.09%
    Real Estate:          
    Allied Properties Real Estate Investment Trust 165,000 1,741,388 1,567,282 1.10% 0.92%
    Chartwell Retirement Residences 525,000 3,300,753 4,388,973 3.08% 2.58%
    Choice Properties Real Estate Investment Trust 510,000 3,933,239 3,767,809 2.64% 2.22%
    Dream Industrial Real Estate Investment Trust 480,000 3,416,733 3,143,563 2.20% 1.85%
    First Capital Real Estate Investment Trust 400,000 4,133,660 3,755,033 2.63% 2.21%
    Granite Real Estate Investment Trust 50,000 1,901,782 1,915,011 1.34% 1.13%
    Nexus Industrial Real Estate Investment Trust 510,000 2,422,787 2,175,697 1.52% 1.28%
    RioCan Real Estate Investment Trust 390,000 3,566,552 3,947,118 2.77% 2.32%
    Sienna Senior Living Inc. 360,000 3,065,893 3,119,566 2.19% 1.84%
    SmartCentres Real Estate Investment Trust 275,000 3,609,356 3,730,315 2.61% 2.19%
        31,092,143 31,510,367 22.08% 18.54%
    Telecommunications:          
    BCE Inc. 240,000 8,116,899 4,439,382 3.11% 2.62%
    Total Equities   148,566,476 169,952,944 119.10% 100.00%
    Total investments (2024)   148,566,473 169,952,944 119.10% 100.00%
    Total investments (2023)   132,440,939 146,643,502 113.28% 100.00%

    Independent Auditors’ Report

    To the Shareholders of Middlefield Canadian Income PCC (The “Company”)

    Opinion

    We have audited the financial statements of Middlefield Canadian Income PCC (the “Company”), which comprise the Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December 2024, and notes 1 to 4 to the financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and UK-adopted International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’).

    In our opinion the financial statements:

    give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Company as at 31 December 2024 and of its results for the year then ended;

    have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted IFRS; and

    have been prepared in accordance with the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991.

    Separate opinion in relation to IFRS as adopted by the European Union

    As explained in note 1, in addition to complying with the Listing Rules obligation to apply UK-adopted IFRS, the Fund has also applied IFRS as adopted by the European Union.

    In our opinion the financial statements give a true and fair view of the financial position of the Fund as at 31 December 2024 and of its financial performance and cash flows for the year then ended in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the European Union.

    Basis for opinion

    We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (‘ISAs (UK)’) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of this report. We are independent of the Company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in Jersey, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

    Material uncertainty relating to going concern

    We draw attention to note 2n to the financial statements of the Fund which indicates that the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern is dependent on the outcome of the directors review of a number of strategic options for the future of the Fund and Company as described in note 2n. As stated in note 2n these events presented by the directors indicate that a material uncertainty exists that may cast significant doubt on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern. Our opinion is not qualified in respect of this matter.

    In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.

    Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the Company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting, included:

    Considering the appropriateness of the directors’ conclusion in relation to the matters described in 2n and discussing this with the board;

    Review of the directors’ statement in note 2n and their identification of any material uncertainties to the Company’s ability to continue over a period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements;

    Consideration as part of our risk assessment of the nature of the Company, its business model and related risks including where relevant the requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework and the system of internal control; and

    Evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, including challenging the underlying data and key assumptions used to make the assessment, and evaluation of the directors’ plans for future actions in relation to their going concern assessment.

    Other than the above, based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties, other than as disclosed in note 2n to the financial statements of the Fund, relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements.

    Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report.

    Other information

    The directors are responsible for the other information. Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and we do not express any form of assurance conclusions thereon.

    In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements of this other information, we are required to report that fact.

    Independent Auditors’ Report continued

    Other information (continued)

    We have nothing to report in this regard.

    Matters on which we are required to report by exception

    We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion;

    adequate accounting records have not been kept; or

    the financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

    proper returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or

    we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

    Responsibilities of directors

    As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities set out on page 40, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements in accordance with UK-adopted IFRS and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

    In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

    Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements

    Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

    As part of an audit in accordance with ISAs (UK), we exercise professional judgement and maintain professional scepticism throughout the audit. We also:

    Identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to fraud or error, design and perform audit procedures responsive to those risks, and obtain audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than the one resulting from error, as fraud may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal control.

    Obtain an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control.

    Evaluate the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates and related disclosures made by the directors.

    Conclude on the appropriateness of the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting and, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in our auditors’ report to the related disclosures in the financial statements or, if such disclosures are inadequate, to modify our opinion. Our conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up to the date of our auditors’ report. However, future events or conditions may cause the Company to cease to continue as a going concern.

    Evaluate the overall presentation, structure and content of the financial statements, including the disclosures, and whether the financial statements represent the underlying transactions and events in a manner that achieves fair presentation.

    We communicate with those charged with governance regarding, among other matters, the planned scope and timing of the audit and significant audit findings, including any significant deficiencies in internal control that we identify during our audit.

    Independent Auditors’ Report continued

    To the Shareholders of Middlefield Canadian Income PCC (The “Company”)

    The extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud

    Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is explained below.

    The objectives of our audit are to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance with laws and regulations that have a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, to perform audit procedures to help identify instances of non-compliance with other laws and regulations that may have a material effect on the financial statements, and to respond appropriately to identified or suspected non-compliance with laws and regulations identified during the audit.

    In relation to fraud, the objectives of our audit are to identify and assess the risk of material misstatement of the financial statements due to fraud, to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the assessed risks of material misstatement due to fraud through designing and implementing appropriate responses and to respond appropriately to fraud or suspected fraud identified during the audit.

    However, it is the primary responsibility of the directors to ensure that the entity’s operations are conducted in accordance with the provisions of laws and regulations and for the prevention and detection of fraud.

    We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that the entity operates in, focusing on provisions of those laws and regulations that had a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. This included compliance with Companies (Jersey) Law 1991.

    Our testing included:

    enquiries of the directors regarding known or suspect instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations;

    enquiries of the directors regarding known or suspect instances of irregularities, including fraud;

    undertaking analytical procedures to identify unusual or unexpected relationships;

    review of minutes of meetings throughout the year;

    testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments; and

    agreement of the financial statement disclosures to underlying supporting documentation.

    Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit there is an unavoidable risk that some material misstatement of the financial statements may not be detected, even though the audit is properly planned and performed in accordance with ISAs (UK). However, the principal responsibility for ensuring that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error, rests with the directors who should not rely on the audit to discharge those functions.

    In addition, as with any audit, there remains a higher risk of non-detection of fraud, as this may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect material misstatement. We are not responsible for preventing non-compliance or fraud and cannot be expected to detect non-compliance with all laws and regulations.

    Use of our report

    This report is made solely to the Company’s shareholders as a body, in accordance with Article 113A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s shareholders those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s shareholders as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

    Philip Crosby

    For & on behalf of

    RSM Channel Islands (Audit) Limited

    Chartered Accountants and Recognised Auditors

    Jersey, C.I.

    Date 24 March 2025

    Statement of Financial Position of the Company

    As at 31 December 2024

        2024 2023
      Notes GBP GBP
    Current assets      
    Other receivables   2 2
    Net assets   2 2
    Equity attributable to equity holders      
    Stated capital 2 2 2
    Total Shareholders’ equity   2 2

    The financial statements and notes on pages 84 to 85 were approved by the directors on 24 March 2025 and signed on behalf of the Board by:

    Michael Phair        Andrew Zychowski

    Director                Director

    Notes to the Financial Statements of the Company

    For the year ended 31 December 2024

    1.        Basis of accounting

    The separate financial statements of the Company have been prepared showing results of the Company only. They have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted IFRS in accordance with the accounting policies set out in Note 2 to the financial statements of the Fund.

    The financial statements of the Fund have been prepared on the historical cost basis, except for the measurement at fair value of investments and derivatives, and in accordance with UK-adopted IFRS and interpretations issued by the IFRSIC.

    A separate Statement of Comprehensive Income, Statement of Changes in Equity and Cash Flow Statement have not been prepared as there have been no results or cash flows for the Company for this year or the preceding year.

    There are no standards and interpretations in issue but not effective that the directors believe would or might have a material impact on the financial statements of the Company.

    Judgements and estimates used by the directors

    The preparation of financial statements in compliance with IFRS requires the directors to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of policies and reported amount of assets and liabilities, income and expenses. The estimates and associated liabilities are based on historical experience and various other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent. For the purposes of these financial statements, there were no specific areas in which judgement was exercised and no estimation was required by the directors.

    2.        The Company’s stated capital

    The authorised share capital of the Company is split into two management shares of no par value.

      No. of shares GBP
    Management shares issued    
    At 31 December 2024 and 2023 2 2

    3.        Taxation

    The Company adopted UK tax residency on 11 October 2011. Since that date, the Company has been managed in such a way as to be able to meet the conditions for approval as an investment trust under Section 1158 of the Corporation Tax Act 2010. Accordingly, no UK tax has been provided for. On 7 December 2012, the Company received approval from HM Revenue & Customs to be treated as an investment trust in accordance with Section 1158 of the Corporation Tax Act 2010 and will seek to remain so approved.

    4.        Ultimate holding company

    The ultimate holding company is Middlefield Limited.

    Definitions

    AGM                                        Annual General Meeting

    AIC                                          The Association of Investment Companies

    AIC Code                                The AIC Code of Corporate Governance published in February, 2019

    AIF                                          Alternative investment fund

    AIFM                                       Alternative investment fund manager

    AIFMD                                     Alternative Investment Fund Managers Directive

    Annual Financial Report          Annual report and financial statements

    Auditor                                     RSM Channel Islands (Audit) Limited

    Benchmark                              The S&P TSX Composite High Dividend Index

    CAD                                        Canadian Dollar

    Cell or Fund                            Middlefield Canadian Income – GBP PC

    Cell AGM                                 An annual general meeting of the holders of Fund Shares

    Company or MCT                   Middlefield Canadian Income PCC

    CORRA                                  Canadian Overnight Repo Rate Average administered and published by the Bank of Canada

    Credit Facility                         The on-demand credit facility with RBC

    ESG                                       Environmental, Social and Governance

    EU                                         European Union

    FCA                                       Financial Conduct Authority

    FRC                                       Financial Reporting Council

    Fund Shares                          The redeemable participating preference shares of no par value in the Fund

    GBP                                      Great British Pounds or Sterling

    IFRSIC                                  International Financial Reporting Standards Interpretations Committee

    IFRS                                      International Financial Reporting Standards

    JFSC                                     Jersey Financial Services Commission

    Listing Rules                         The listing rules made by the FCA under Part VI of the Financial Services and Market Authority

    NAV                                       Net Asset Value of the Company in GBP

    Prime Loan                           Loans to which the Prime Rate can be applied

    Prime Rate                            Annual interest rate set by Canada’s major banks and financial institutions

    RBC                                      Royal Bank of Canada

    REIT                                     Real estate investment trust

    SID                                       Senior Independent Director

    SORP                                   Statement of recommended practice

    Term CORRA loan                The amount drawn under the Credit Facility

    UK Code                                The 2019 UK Corporate Governance Code published by the FRC in July 2018

    USMCA                                  Free trade agreement between the United States, Mexico and Canada

    2        LR.11.2.6: No more than 10% of the Company’s total assets may be invested in other listed closed-ended investment companies unless such investment companies themselves have published investment policies to invest no more than 15% of their total assets in other closed-ended investment companies, in which case the limit is 15%.

    Alternative Performance Measures

    An APM is a measure of performance or financial position that is not defined in applicable accounting standards and cannot be directly derived from the financial statements. The Company’s APMs are set out below and are cross-referenced where relevant to the financial inputs used to derive them as contained in other sections of the Annual Report.

    Benchmark

    The Company’s Benchmark index, used for performance comparative purposes, is the S&P/TSX Composite High Dividend Index. Prior to 31 October 2024, the Benchmark was calculated gross of withholding tax. Beginning 31 October 2024, the Benchmark is calculated net of a 15% withholding tax in sterling terms with dividends reinvested.

    Discount or Premium

    Investment trust shares can frequently trade at a discount to NAV. This occurs when the share price (based on the mid-market share price) is less than the NAV and investors may therefore buy shares at less than the value attributable to them by reference to the underlying assets. The discount is the difference between the share price and the NAV, expressed as a percentage of the NAV.

    Net Asset Value (NAV) per Redeemable Participating Preference Share

    This is the value of the Company’s assets attributable to one redeemable participating preference share. It is calculated by dividing ‘equity shareholders’ funds’ by the total number of redeemable participating preference shares in issue (excluding treasury shares).

    Gearing/(Net Cash)

    Investment companies can borrow to purchase additional investments. This is called ‘gearing’. It allows investment companies to take advantage of a long-term view on a sector or to take advantage of a favourable situation or a particularly attractive stock without having to sell existing investments. Gearing works by magnifying a company’s performance. If a company ‘gears up’ and then markets rise and returns on the investments outstrip the costs of borrowing, the overall returns to investors will be even greater. But if markets fall and the performance of the assets in the portfolio is poor, then losses suffered by the investor will also be magnified. The Company may achieve gearing through borrowings or the effect of gearing through an appropriate balance of equity capital and borrowings.

    Ongoing Charges

    Ongoing charges are those expenses of a type which are likely to recur in the foreseeable future, whether charged to capital or revenue, and which relate to the operation of the investment company as a collective fund. Ongoing charges are based on costs incurred in the year as being the best estimate of future costs and include the annual management charge.

    Yield

    The yield is the amount of cash (in percentage terms) that is returned to the owners of the security, in the form of interest or dividends received from it. Normally, it does not include price variations, distinguishing it from performance (with dividends reinvested).

    LONDON, ENGLAND

    Middlefield International Limited

    288 Bishopsgate

    London, England

    EC2M 4QP

    Telephone +44 (0) 20 7814 6644

    Fax +44 (0) 20 7814 66 11

    TORONTO, CANADA

    Middlefield Group

    Suite 3100

    8 Spadina Ave

    Toronto, Ontario

    Canada M5V 0S8

    Telephone 001 (416) 362-0714

    www.middlefield.co.uk

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI Australia: Minister Rishworth interview on ABC Afternoon Briefing

    Source: Government of Victoria 3

    E&OE TRANSCRIPT

    TOM LOWREY, HOST: Can I take you first to those comments from shadow minister for finance, Jane Hume. What did you make of them and is there room to trim the NDIS further?

    AMANDA RISHWORTH, MINISTER FOR SOCIAL SERVICES: Firstly, I would say Jane Hume has her numbers incorrect. The last year the Liberals were in government there was a 22 per cent growth rate of the NDIS. So, we’ve been working very hard to make this scheme sustainable. We’ve been working with people with disability, getting it back on track. And I have to say Jane Hume is also wrong to say that we are not meeting our targets that we set. National Cabinet set the target of eight per cent growth by 1 July 2026 and this year we had predicted that we would be at a 12 per cent growth rate. Actually, we’re doing better than that. The most recent figures coming out from the NDIA year to date is we are down to 10 per cent. So, we’re working very diligently but importantly we’re working with people with disability. Now, Jane Hume does have to be honest about what she would cut. We’ve been very clear about what our pathway is for reform. She has not been clear about what her cuts would be. Some of the suggestions about where growth should track at would suggest that no new participants could enter the scheme next year if she was to follow some of the comments that she has thrown around. So, this would be deeply concerning if no new participants could enter the scheme in the next financial year. Unfortunately I think Jane Hume hasn’t actually looked back at the record of the Liberal Party when they were in government a 22 per cent growth rate. We have got it down to 10 per cent. We’re on track to reach our eight per cent target. We will keep doing that, but in a way that has equity, fairness and transparency at its heart.

    TOM LOWREY: To be clear, Jane Hume said the first priority has to be hitting that eight per cent target. Are you confident that eight per cent target will be hit by the middle of next year?

    AMANDA RISHWORTH: I am very reassured about the progress that we’ve made. As I said, part of the way to meet that growth target was to reach 12 per cent this financial year. The most recent data has suggested that we would be hitting 10 per cent this year. So, that is significant progress that we’ve been making. But we’ve been making it by going back to the intent of the scheme, not just random cuts to people, but actually going back to the intent of the scheme, which is clearly outlining what are NDIS supports and what are not and working with people, to work within the budget of their plan. These are some of the changes we’ve made and we will continue to make progress. I’m very confident of us meeting that target.

    TOM LOWREY: Yeah, the Grattan Institute had some analysis out, I think earlier this week or last week that suggested that hitting that eight per cent target won’t be easy. But keeping growth below that eight per cent into the future would be particularly challenging. How do you constrain the growth of the NDIS into the future?

    AMANDA RISHWORTH: What we’re doing is making sure that we go back to the original intent of the scheme and that’s reasonable and necessary supports. I mean some of the behaviour that we saw while the previous government was in office that they did let a lot of fraud flourish. So, we have been very much focused on cracking down on fraud and dodgy providers as just one example. But it’s also been being clear about what is a NDIS support and what is not a NDIS support. How do we make sure that we have effective use of budgets and plans so that we have contained intra plan growth and that is making sure that people are getting supports that they need within their plan that they have received. So, we’re doing a lot of work there. That is how we have been able to achieve the reduction from 22 per cent growth under the coalition. That’s where we’re making progress. But we know it’s a challenge. We will continue to work with people with disability to ensure that we get the settings right, not make just gross cuts like it’s that the coalition is planning to do.

    TOM LOWREY: Part of that agreement at National Cabinet that you mentioned earlier was for the states to do more of the heavy lifting, to start to put in those services that perhaps had been in place before the NDIS was introduced that have since been removed. Have you seen any progress on that front? Are the states pulling their weight the way you’d like?

    AMANDA RISHWORTH: Well, what was in that agreement was joint funding between the states and territories and the Commonwealth for supports outside the NDIS. I’ve been having very good conversations with my state colleagues and we continue to work and talk about what are some of the gaps, what are the some of these services that they could deliver, what are some of the services that are needed. It’s different in each state and territory. So, that work is progressing, but it is not conditional on the progress that we’ve made. The progress that we’ve made around, for example, what is and isn’t a NDIS support has been done separate to the work being done on foundational support. So, we’ll continue that work with our states and territories. I need to be clear that we offered co-funding with the states and territories and we’ll keep working with them.

    TOM LOWREY: I just want to briefly touch on some figures that came out today. You’ve suggested that withdrawing superannuation for housing could wind up adding a $1.4 billion hit to the age pension down the track. What were the assumptions you made to get there? How did you get to that figure?

    AMANDA RISHWORTH: These were assumptions made by the PBO. It took a pretty conservative case of someone around the age of 40 withdrawing the $50,000 that the Coalition would allow them to do. What we already know from analysis done last week was that would potentially add more than $70,000 to a house price. But what this evidence and the modelling shows is that having a situation where you can withdraw superannuation for housing would mean more people having to rely on the pension in their older age and that would cost the taxpayer approximately $1.4 billion annually. So, this is just bad policy all around. It’s bad for taxpayers, it’s bad for people who want to have a secure retirement and don’t necessarily, after they’ve paid into super, want to rely on a full pension or a part pension. But it’s also bad at pushing up housing prices, making it more out of reach for more Australians to get into the housing market. So, it’s lose, lose.

    TOM LOWREY: Amanda Rishworth, out of Time. Thanks so much for joining me.

    MIL OSI News

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Mayor says lack of government funding forces reliance on overseas investment for London’s Growth Plan, in response to Zoë Garbett’s questions

    Source: Mayor of London

    20th March 2025 

    Mayor says lack of government funding forces reliance on overseas investment for London’s Growth Plan, in response to Zoë Garbett’s questions 

    During today’s Mayor’s Question Time (MQT), Zoë Garbett, Green Party London Assembly Member, raised concerns about the Mayor’s London Growth Plan – published last month – specifically highlighting his heavy reliance on overseas investment to address the city’s housing crisis. Zoë told the Mayor that this would only continue to exacerbate the issue of housing inequality in the city.  

    In response, the Mayor defended his position, saying, “we do want foreign investment for the simple reason that there has not been enough investment from the Government.” 

    Reflecting on the Mayor’s response, Zoë Garbett AM says:  

    “London’s housing market is broken. It’s designed for the wealthy to profit while Londoners suffer. Overseas investment is not a solution to the housing crisis – in fact, it’s made the situation worse. 

    “It’s telling that the Mayor has admitted he’s forced to rely on overseas investment while the Labour government refuses to provide essential public funds for housing. What kind of message does that send about priorities? Londoners deserve better than to be left at the mercy of speculative overseas money. 

    “With Londoners’ spending 40% of their wages on rent, 60,000 families stuck in temporary accommodation, social housing waiting lists at a ten year high and 300,000 homes approved but not built, it’s clear the current system is not working. 

    “Sky-high rents and the cost of living crisis are leaving schools struggling to stay open and driving families out of the city they call home.  

    “Without a meaningful shift in government policy and funding, London’s housing market will continue to serve the interests of a wealthy few.” 

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI Economics: Publication of financial reports: Federal Office of Justice imposes disciplinary fine on DEMIRE Deutsche Mittelstand Real Estate AG

    Source: Bundesanstalt für Finanzdienstleistungsaufsicht – In English

    The disciplinary fine order related to a breach of section 325 of the German Commercial Code (Handelsgesetzbuch – HGB). DEMIRE Deutsche Mittelstand Real Estate AG failed to submit its accounting documents for the financial year 2023 for the purpose of disclosure to the operator of the German Federal Gazette (Bundesanzeiger) in electronic form within the prescribed period. The legal basis for the sanction is section 335 of the HGB.

    The company did not lodge an appeal against the Federal Office of Justice’s decision to impose a disciplinary fine.

    MIL OSI Economics

  • MIL-OSI Banking: Publication of financial reports: Federal Office of Justice imposes disciplinary fine on DEMIRE Deutsche Mittelstand Real Estate AG

    Source: Bundesanstalt für Finanzdienstleistungsaufsicht – In English

    The disciplinary fine order related to a breach of section 325 of the German Commercial Code (Handelsgesetzbuch – HGB). DEMIRE Deutsche Mittelstand Real Estate AG failed to submit its consolidated accounting documents for the financial year 2023 for the purpose of disclosure to the operator of the German Federal Gazette (Bundesanzeiger) in electronic form within the prescribed period. The legal basis for the sanction is section 335 of the HGB.

    The company did not lodge an appeal against the Federal Office of Justice’s decision to impose a disciplinary fine.

    MIL OSI Global Banks

  • MIL-OSI USA: SCHUMER REVEALS: TRUMP’S NEWEST ORDER COULD BLOW $5 BILLION DOLLAR HOLE IN NY’S “MAIN STREET” LENDING FOR SMALL BUSINESSES, AFFORDABLE HOUSING, MORTGAGES & MORE; SENATOR LEADS FIGHT FOR IMMEDIATE…

    US Senate News:

    Source: United States Senator for New York Charles E Schumer
    In Recent Days, Trump Signed Executive Order To Dismantle Community Development Financial Institutions (CDFI) Fund, Which Provides Hundreds Of Millions Of Fed Investment Annually To Lenders To Increase Access To Capital For Underserved Areas Like Upstate NY & Rural Communities To Help People Buy A Homes, Boost Small Biz, And More
    Schumer Shows How These Devastating Cuts Would Be Felt From Buffalo To Albany, In Every Region – CDFI’s In Upstate NY Have Helped 12,000+ Upstate Businesses Each Year, Nearly 4,000 Families With Mortgages, And Financed Nearly 5,000 Affordable Housing Units
    Schumer: Cutting Off Upstate NY From This Main Street Lending Program Would Be A Disaster– And Trump Must Reverse This Decision
    After President Trump signed an executive order to dismantle the U.S. Department of Treasury’s Community Development Financial Institutions (CDFI) Fund, U.S. Senator Chuck Schumer revealed how these devastating proposed cuts would be felt in every corner of Upstate NY by upending the primary lending program for everything from small businesses on our Main Streets to first-time homebuyers.
    Schumer said CDFI’s fill the gaps in lending where capital might not be available for NYer’s looking to buy a home, start or expand a small business, improve their local Main Streets, finance affordable housing and hospitals, and more. Schumer is now leading a bipartisan coalition of senators to call on the Trump administration to preserve this vital fund – an essential and affordable stream of lending for communities like Upstate NY and cities and rural communities across America.  
    “The Trump administration just unwisely put Upstate NY’s Main Street lending on the chopping block, something that will hurt new families trying to buy homes and entrepreneurs starting and expanding small businesses. The CDFI fund is used from Buffalo to Albany to help NY families buy homes, grow their small businesses, improve healthcare, and rebuild our Main Streets, and taking it away would be a disaster. It could blow a $5 billion dollar hole in New York’s community lending sector, raising costs and cutting off loans and investment for anyone who doesn’t have access to big banks,” said Senator Schumer. “I am all for cutting out inefficiency, but you use a scalpel, not a chainsaw. And you certainly don’t slash programs like the CDFI Fund which has a clear track record of using federal investment to leverage magnitudes more in private investment to help regular people buy homes and start businesses. It is one of the best bang for your buck programs we have for Upstate NY small businesses and families buying homes. I am leading a bipartisan fight for the Trump administration to reverse this destructive proposal and preserve the CDFI Fund to keep the support flowing to Upstate NY’s Main Streets and the middle class.”
    The CDFI Fund supports CDFI lenders in their mission to provide small businesses and housing and community development projects with capital investment unavailable in their local economies. Each year, CDFIs provide affordable growth capital to thousands of small businesses and finance over $100 billion in residential real estate, bringing down the cost of housing through new construction and affordable home mortgages. Schumer said the elimination of key CDFI Fund functions would undermine this important progress, including for small businesses and homeowners. In New York, CDFIs have supported hospital renovations, affordable housing conversions, projects bringing fresh food to local communities, small business expansions, and more. A breakdown of funding by region in New York for small businesses and housing can be found below. A list of New York projects can be found here.

    NY Region

    Total Funding for Businesses

    Total $ for Consumer and Mortgage Loans

    Total $ to Real Estate/Other

    Total $

    Total Originations to Businesses and MicroBusinesses

    Total Consumer and Mortgage Originations

    Capital Region

    $9,180,874

    $27,135,370

    $29,819,183

    $66,135,427

                              566

                                29

    Western New York

    $11,228,096

    $46,150,746

    $25,870,271

    $83,249,114

                              982

                              147

    Central New York

    $9,152,171

    $310,218,718

    $42,333,001

    $361,703,890

                           1,640

                           2,383

    Rochester-Finger Lakes

    $14,907,370

    $24,703,146

    $32,304,491

    $71,915,007

                              923

                              143

    Hudson Valley

    $29,047,167

    $197,250,314

    $57,893,068

    $284,190,549

                           2,701

                              420

    Long Island

    $45,142,052

    $521,605,405

    $230,171,098

    $796,918,555

                           4,576

                              138

    Mohawk Valley

    $1,807,015

    $17,704,789

    $30,908,401

    $50,420,205

                              205

                              193

    New York City

    $953,617,956

    $1,640,431,432

    $993,819,971

    $3,587,869,360

                       112,301

                              777

    North Country

    $1,201,725

    $6,659,354

    $9,908,746

    $17,769,825

                                91

                                21

    Southern Tier

    $5,185,497

    $24,298,698

    $17,423,745

    $46,907,940

                              304

                              214

    Total

    $1,080,469,923

    $2,816,157,972

    $1,470,451,977

    $5,367,079,872

                       124,289

                           4,465

    “Support from the CDFI Fund allows us to maximize our impact in New York’s low-income areas – urban, rural and everywhere in between,” said Colleen Ryan, consulting executive director of the NYS CDFI Coalition. “Local CDFIs develop unique programs and tailored resources by leveraging federal dollars with private capital. These grants are not spent down, as traditional grants are. Instead, as loans are repaid, the funds are recycled into new projects. In addition to lending, we offer technical assistance to our borrowers to help them develop much-needed housing, build businesses, and revitalize neighborhoods. We urge continued support for the CDFI Fund, which provides consistent return on investment.”
    Schumer said it is unacceptable that the Trump administration is eliminating the CDFI Fund and its vital support to lowering the cost of housing and helping more Americans start a business or rebuild their community, and warned that this Trump cut will have severe impacts on New York. In 2022, CDFIs helped deliver over $1 billion in capital for small business and housing and community projects. This investment alone supported the creation of over 20,000 affordable housing units across New York State.
    The CDFI Fund provides the necessary investment to start and support the national network of CDFI lenders to bring private capital to more communities. For every $1 in federal funding awarded through the CDFI Fund, at least $8 in private sector investment is leveraged—mobilizing local capital, creating jobs, and fueling small business and affordable housing growth. The CDFI network serves communities throughout the country, from rural to big cities to suburban areas, and as a result, has had long-standing bipartisan support.
    Schumer’s letter to Treasury Secretary Bessent along with Sens. Warner and Crapo, Tina Smith (D-MN), Cindy Hyde-Smith (R-MS), Amy Klobuchar (D-MN), Roger Wicker (R-MS), Rev. Raphael Warnock (D-GA), Dr. Bill Cassidy (R-LA), Chris Van Hollen (D-MD), Mike Rounds (R-SD), Jack Reed (D-RI), Steve Daines (R-MT), Gary Peters (D-MI), John Boozman (R-AR), John Hickenlooper (D-CO), Lisa Murkowski (R-AK), Ron Wyden (D-OR), Tim Sheehy (R-MT), Cory Booker (D-NJ), Jim Justice (R-WV), Dick Durbin (D-IL), and Ruben Gallego (D-AZ) can be found HERE or below:
    We write to reaffirm our bipartisan support of the CDFI Fund, its operations and the critical role it plays in the communities it serves. We appreciate your recent statement recognizing how the CDFI Fund and CDFIs are integral to the Administration’s pursuit of job growth, wealth creation and prosperity.
    Federal support for the CDFI mission began in 1994, with enactment of the bipartisan Riegle Community Development and Regulatory Improvement Act. Since its inception over three decades ago, the CDFI Fund has proven critical to the CDFI sector’s growth and has met the mission to create a public-private partnership to promote access to capital in our most underserved urban and rural communities.
    Over 1,400 CDFIs represent a significant portion of America’s financial services sector, delivering over $300 billion in financial services each year to urban and rural communities across every state. Each year, CDFIs provide affordable growth capital to over 100,000 small businesses and finance over $100 billion in residential real estate, bringing down the cost of housing through new construction and affordable home mortgages. The important work of the CDFI sector is strengthened by the CDFI Fund, which provides seed funding to new CDFIs, grows the capacity of existing CDFIs, and provides oversight to ensure federal dollars are spent appropriately. Elimination of key CDFI Fund functions would undermine this important progress, including for small businesses and homeowners.
    The CDFI Fund’s public-private partnership model aligns with this Administration’s emphasis on ensuring that taxpayer dollars are spent efficiently and with measurable impact. Every federal dollar injected into a CDFI generates at least eight more dollars from private-sector investment. Due in large part to the investments the Trump Administration made in the CDFI Fund in 2020, industry assets have tripled and the number of CDFI-certified entities has risen by 40 percent.
    In sum, more distressed communities are being served by CDFIs than ever before, more firsttime buyers are receiving the financing they need to purchase a home, more community facilities are being built, and more commercial loans are reaching entrepreneurs. A reduction in the functions and operations of the CDFI Fund will have a corresponding impact on CDFI-certified entities and local communities and we urge you to avoid this unfortunate outcome.
    Thank you for your consideration of our request. We stand ready to work with your Administration to promote policies that deliver opportunity and prosperity to all Americans.

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI Europe: Written question – The detrimental impact of housing market regulation on supply and prices – E-001072/2025

    Source: European Parliament

    Question for written answer  E-001072/2025
    to the Commission
    Rule 144
    Nora Junco García (ECR), Diego Solier (ECR)

    Recent experience in Argentina shows how the removal of regulations in the housing market has led to a significant increase in supply. In contrast, Spain’s Housing Law has had the opposite effect: a 3 % contraction in supply and a 24 % increase in short-term rental prices, making access to housing more difficult for citizens.

    This evidence suggests that a policy based on price controls and overregulation produces negative effects, discouraging investment and reducing available supply. State intervention in rental markets – far from solving the problem – seems to aggravate the housing crisis. Moreover, legal uncertainty for landlords, coupled with the proliferation of ‘inquiokupas’ (squatters), further discourages renting, worsening the shortage of supply and driving up prices.

    Given the Commission’s role in promoting best practices and removing barriers that hinder competitiveness within the EU, it is crucial to assess these policies from a perspective based on economic efficiency and market freedom.

    In the light of the above:

    • 1.Does the Commission plan to produce a report on the impact of national regulations on housing availability in the Member States?
    • 2.What measures is the Commission taking to foster a more dynamic housing market that attracts private investment within the EU?
    • 3.Does the Commission consider that rent controls may lead to a contraction in supply, as shown by the data from Spain?

    Submitted: 12.3.2025

    Last updated: 20 March 2025

    MIL OSI Europe News

  • MIL-OSI Canada: Prime Minister Carney will eliminate GST for first-time homebuyers

    Source: Government of Canada – Prime Minister

    Canada is in a housing crisis – demand has gone up, supply has not kept pace, and prices are too high. The new government of Canada is taking immediate action to address this crisis.

    Prime Minister Carney today announced that the Government of Canada will eliminate the Goods and Services Tax (GST) for first-time homebuyers on homes at or under $1 million. This tax cut will save Canadians up to $50,000 – allowing more young people and families to enter the housing market and realize the dream of homeownership. By eliminating the GST, Canadians will face lower upfront housing costs and keep more money in their pocket. Eliminating the GST will also have a dynamic effect on increasing supply – spurring the construction of new homes across the country.

    The Prime Minister is laser-focused on lowering costs and will continue to present serious solutions to ensure Canadians are better off. The Government of Canada will confront the housing crisis head-on and build the strongest economy in the G7.

    Quote

    “Our government is laser-focused on lowering costs for Canadians and making homeownership a reality. Eliminating the GST will save first-time homebuyers up to $50,000 and spur housing construction across the country. We will announce a series of new measures to increase housing supply shortly. It’s time for focused action to solve the housing crisis, and it’s time to build a Canada you can afford.”
    — The Rt. Hon. Mark Carney, Prime Minister of Canada

    MIL OSI Canada News

  • MIL-OSI: PropTech Investor Oparo Strengthens its Leadership with Graham Martin joining as CEO

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    London, March 20, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — In a strategic move to bolster its impact in the UK real estate technology and investment sector, Oparo Group has appointed Graham Martin as Chief Executive Officer. Graham takes over from Babak Gharbi, who will now serve as Non-Executive Chairman, continuing to guide the company’s strategic vision since its inception in 2018.

    Graham brings over 30 years of international expertise in restructuring, corporate turnaround, and financial advisory, with notable stints at big four accountants KPMG and PwC. His rich experience in real estate, banking, and investment has involved managing complex transactions and advising on £100bn worth of loan portfolio sales. His leadership will be pivotal in driving the growth and adoption of Oparo Group’s investment capacity through its digital platforms, Oparo REACT (Real Estate Asset Curated Targeting) and Oparo RAM (Remote Asset Management).

    “I am thrilled to lead Oparo Group in its mission to transform the real estate and  social housing industry through innovative technology”, said Graham Martin. “My aim is to enhance our access to purpose driven capital,  our profitability, and digital offerings, whilst, staying true to our social mission which is at the core of our business.”

    Babak Gharbi’s transition to Chairman follows his significant contributions helping the team setting industry benchmarks with Oparo’s unwavering commitment to the direct Real Estate investment model and its impact-driven social mission through technology.

    “Graham’s deep-rooted knowledge and proven track record in real estate investment and expansion strategies make him the perfect fit to steer Oparo Group into a new era of growth,” said Babak Gharbi. “His expertise will be vital in broadening our market influence and solidifying our position.”

    Oparo Group’s innovative approach combines real estate investment with technology innovation, addressing social housing challenges through its Oparo RAM platform that uses IoT for sophisticated asset management. Oparo Social 1, a collaborative project to deliver a lease-based social housing portfolio with a real estate focussed hedge fund. Oparo is currently expanding its capital partnerships to deliver more high quality social housing, backed by long term leases. 

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Oxford City Council Approves Redevelopment Plans for 38-40 George Street for New Wilde Aparthotel and Community Space

    Source: City of Oxford

    Published: Thursday, 20 March 2025

    PRESS RELEASE ON BEHALF OF MARICK REAL ESTATE: Oxford City Council Approves Redevelopment Plans for 38-40 George Street for New Wilde Aparthotel and Community Space

    Marick Real Estate is thrilled to announce that Oxford City Council has approved plans to redevelop 38-40 George Street into a stunning 145-room aparthotel operated by Staycity Group under their lifestyle Wilde brand. This major development will not only enhance the city’s hospitality offerings but also bring vital community benefits, making it a landmark project for the Gloucester Green area. 

    In addition to the aparthotel, the development will include a 400m² community space, developed in partnership with Makespace Oxford. This versatile space will serve as a hub for a wide variety of community activities, further enriching the local area and providing a welcoming environment for residents and visitors alike. 

    The project, designed with sustainability at its core, will be awarded a BREEAM “Excellent” rating. It will contribute to Oxford’s green agenda by achieving a 60% Biodiversity Net Gain, enrolling into the City’s “Safe Places” scheme, and reducing carbon emissions by over 40%. This scheme promises to set a new standard for environmentally responsible development in Oxford. 

    Councillor Ed Turner, Cabinet Member for Finance and Asset Management, commented: “This is an exciting milestone for the project and I look forward to seeing more detailed plans emerge as the team moves forward. This regeneration will revitalise the area, provide much-needed accommodation relieving pressure on family homes, and create a dedicated community space. It will also support local jobs, with workers being paid at least the Oxford Living Wage. We look forward to seeing it take shape.”  

    Andrew Heselton, of Marick Real Estate, expressed his enthusiasm for the project: “We are pleased to achieve this important milestone and look forward to developing the design, securing third-party agreements, and procuring our construction partner for this scheme prior to commencing the works in early 2026.” 

    The regeneration of 38-40 George Street promises to be a significant step forward in enhancing Oxford’s urban landscape, supporting its local economy, and improving the overall quality of life for residents. Staycity’s Wilde aparthotel will offer a unique, premium experience, while the new community space will become a valuable asset for people of all ages. 

    Construction is set to begin in early 2026, marking the start of an exciting new chapter for the city’s vibrant Gloucester Green area. 

    For any further information please visit the project website: www.george-street.co.uk 

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI Europe: Answer to a written question – Measures to allow young couples and young people to become homeowners – E-002949/2024(ASW)

    Source: European Parliament

    The Commission shares the Honourable Member’s concerns about the housing situation in Greece and in the whole EU. The Commission has thus appointed a Commissioner for Energy and Housing and established a Task Force for Housing to coordinate the different work strands

    Although the responsibility for housing rests mainly with Member States, regions and local authorities, the Commission will assess how it can continue to contribute to mitigating the housing crisis at the European level, including for youth.

    The Commission will consult stakeholders in 2025 to better understand all the issues on housing and put forward a European Affordable Housing Plan.

    Various EU funds are already available for Member States and local authorities to support social and affordable housing[1]. In addition, the Greek Recovery and Resilience Plan (RRP) foresees two financial instruments[2] that aim addressing pertinent challenges in Greece’s housing market.

    They constitute parts of a more comprehensive housing strategy that is also included in the Plan and will be implemented in Greece in the coming period.

    Complementary actions under RRP, the cohesion policy also co-finance energy efficiency in housing in Greece.[3] In addition, the Plan contains measures that aim to renovate more than 100 000 residences to significantly save primary energy[4].

    Furthermore, in respect of funding and financing, the Commission will continue working closely with international financial institutions, national promotional banks and other relevant stakeholders[5] to make sure that housing is more affordable, in particular for young people and families.

    Procedures for buying a house are governed by national civil law. Hence, simplification thereof falls within the remit of Member States.

    • [1] To assist Member States, the Commission has published a toolkit that provides an overview of available EU funding opportunities in housing: Social Housing and beyond. https://european-social-fund-plus.ec.europa.eu/en/news/commission-launches-toolkit-support-social-housing-member-states The Recovery and Resilience Facility; the European Regional Development Fund; the European Social Fund Plus; the InvestEU; the Horizon Europe; the Technical Support Instrument; the Single Market Programme; the Asylum, Migration and Integration Fund; the Social Climate Fund. Details on each EU support in the toolkit. In addition, the Cohesion Fund and the Just Transition Fund also support the investments in the energy efficiency of housing stock. Details are available in story ‘how cohesion policy supports housing at the Cohesion open data platform.
    • [2] Loans finance for: (i) the acquisition of primary residence for targeted population groups — program “My Home II” (EUR 1 billion); (ii) energy efficiency renovations of existing properties — program “Upgrade My Home” (EUR 300 million).
    • [3] Under the 2021-27 programming period, cohesion policy co-finances with some EUR 751 million interventions for energy efficiency in housing.
    • [4] To date, and according to the most recent updated by the Greek authorities, more than 44,000 renovations have been completed.
    • [5] https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/detail/en/ip_25_671
    Last updated: 19 March 2025

    MIL OSI Europe News

  • MIL-OSI Europe: Answer to a written question – Protecting the rental market from short-term tourist rental platforms – E-002341/2024(ASW)

    Source: European Parliament

    Short-term rentals can influence the availability and affordability of housing, notably in tourism hotspots. At the same time, short-term rentals can also help boost investments in local housing markets and support renovation, notably of vacant houses.

    Firstly, in this context, authorities can increase transparency by requiring hosts to register, and platforms to provide data on short-term rentals, notably thanks to Regulation (EU) 2024/1028[1].

    Moreover, Regulation (EU) 2022/2065[2] requires online platforms to ensure, among others, the traceability of the traders providing services on their platforms and to design their interfaces so that traders can comply with all the obligations required by either national or EU law. The regulation introduces additional obligations for very large platforms, such as Booking.com.

    Furthermore, Directive (EU) 2021/514[3] provides for the exchange of information between platforms and national authorities[4] for tax purposes levelling the playing field in taxation.

    Given the measures above, the Commission has not envisaged, for the time being, to bring forward any legislative initiative to regulate or impose a limit on properties and overnight stays but will continue to explore what can be done to tackle systemic issues with short-term accommodation rentals.

    The Commission intends to launch a policy dialogue with stakeholders to better understand the relationship between short-term rentals and the availability and affordability of housing and identify best practices that are in line Directive 2006/123/EC[5].

    Finally, the Commission has set up a Task Force for Housing that started on 1st February 2025 to support Member States to tackle issues related to the housing crisis.

    • [1] Regulation (EU) 2024/1028 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 April 2024 on data collection and sharing relating to short-term accommodation rental services and amending Regulation (EU) 2018/1724.
    • [2] Regulation (EU) 2022/2065 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 19 October 2022 on a Single Market For Digital Services and amending Directive 2000/31/EC (Digital Services Act).
    • [3] Council Directive (EU) 2021/514 of 22 March 2021 amending Directive 2011/16/EU on administrative cooperation in the field of taxation.
    • [4] In the Member States of those platforms and then also among Member States.
    • [5] Directive 2006/123/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 12 December 2006 on services in the internal market.

    MIL OSI Europe News

  • MIL-OSI: Canadian Net REIT Announces the Issuance of Units for Services Rendered and Grant of Performance Units in Relation With Its Unit Compensation Plan

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    MONTRÉAL, March 19, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — (TSX-V: NET.UN) Canadian Net Real Estate Investment Trust (“Canadian Net” or the “Trust”) announces the issuance of 36,577 units of the Trust at a price of $5.68 per unit, which equates to $207,757, and 106,710 deferred trust units as partial compensation for the services rendered by certain employees, members of management and the board of trustees during the fiscal year ended on December 31st, 2024.

    The issuance of the units and deferred trust units of Canadian Net constitutes a portion of salaries as per the Equity Incentive Plan approved by unitholders on May 25, 2022 (the “Equity Incentive Plan”).

    Canadian Net also announces the grant of 154,048 performance units (“Performance Units”) to certain members of management under the Equity Incentive Plan. These units will vest in accordance with the criteria set forth in the Equity Incentive Plan and the achievement of performance targets, set by the board of trustees.

    About Canadian Net – Canadian Net Real Estate Investment Trust is an open-ended trust that acquires and owns high-quality triple net and management-free commercial real estate properties.

    Forward-Looking Statements – This press release contains forward-looking statements and information as defined by applicable securities laws. Canadian Net warns the reader that actual events may differ materially from current expectations due to known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from the results anticipated in such statements. Among these include the risks related to economic conditions, the risks associated with the local real estate market, the dependence to the financial condition of tenants, the uncertainties related to real estate activities, the changes in interest rates, the availability of financing in the form of debt or equity, the effects related to the adoption of new standards, as well as other risks and factors described from time to time in the documents filed by Canadian Net with securities regulators, including the management report. Canadian Net does not intend or undertake to update or modify its forward-looking statements even if future events occur or for any other reason, unless required by law or any regulatory authority.

    Neither the TSX Venture Exchange Inc. nor its Regulation Services Provider (as that term is defined in the Policy of the TSX Venture Exchange) accepts any responsibility for the adequacy or accuracy of this release.

    For further information please contact Kevin Henley at (450) 536-5328.

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: BlackRock® Canada Announces March Cash Distributions for the iShares® ETFs

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    TORONTO, March 19, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — BlackRock Asset Management Canada Limited (“BlackRock Canada”), an indirect, wholly-owned subsidiary of BlackRock, Inc. (NYSE: BLK), today announced the March 2025 cash distributions for the iShares ETFs listed on the TSX or Cboe Canada, which pay on a monthly or quarterly basis. Unitholders of record of the applicable iShares ETF on March 26, 2025, will receive cash distributions payable in respect of that iShares ETF on March 31, 2025.

    Details regarding the “per unit” distribution amounts are as follows:

    Fund Name
    Fund
    Ticker
    Cash
    Distribution
    Per Unit
    iShares 1-10 Year Laddered Corporate Bond Index ETF CBH $0.049
    iShares 1-5 Year Laddered Corporate Bond Index ETF CBO $0.051
    iShares S&P/TSX Canadian Dividend Aristocrats Index ETF CDZ $0.112
    iShares Equal Weight Banc & Lifeco ETF CEW $0.059
    iShares Global Real Estate Index ETF CGR $0.158
    iShares International Fundamental Index ETF CIE $0.077
    iShares Global Infrastructure Index ETF CIF $0.238
    iShares 1-5 Year Laddered Government Bond Index ETF CLF $0.032
    iShares 1-10 Year Laddered Government Bond Index ETF CLG $0.037
    iShares US Fundamental Index ETF CLU $0.173
    iShares US Fundamental Index ETF CLU.C $0.222
    iShares S&P/TSX Canadian Preferred Share Index ETF CPD $0.058
    iShares Canadian Fundamental Index ETF CRQ $0.181
    iShares US Dividend Growers Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) CUD $0.079
    iShares Convertible Bond Index ETF CVD $0.071
    iShares Global Water Index ETF CWW $0.069
    iShares Global Monthly Dividend Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) CYH $0.080
    iShares Canadian Financial Monthly Income ETF FIE $0.040
    iShares ESG Balanced ETF Portfolio GBAL $0.219
    iShares ESG Conservative Balanced ETF Portfolio GCNS $0.229
    iShares ESG Equity ETF Portfolio GEQT $0.166
    iShares ESG Growth ETF Portfolio GGRO $0.193
    iShares U.S. Aggregate Bond Index ETF XAGG $0.105
    iShares U.S. Aggregate Bond Index ETF(1) XAGG.U $0.061
    iShares U.S. Aggregate Bond Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XAGH $0.091
    iShares Core Balanced ETF Portfolio XBAL $0.153
    iShares Core Canadian Universe Bond Index ETF XBB $0.079
    iShares Core Canadian Corporate Bond Index ETF XCB $0.069
    iShares ESG Advanced Canadian Corporate Bond Index ETF XCBG $0.119
    iShares U.S. IG Corporate Bond Index ETF XCBU $0.121
    iShares U.S. IG Corporate Bond Index ETF(1) XCBU.U $0.076
    iShares Canadian Growth Index ETF XCG $0.071
    iShares Core Conservative Balanced ETF Portfolio XCNS $0.135
    iShares S&P/TSX SmallCap Index ETF XCS $0.119
    iShares ESG Advanced MSCI Canada Index ETF XCSR $0.442
    iShares Canadian Value Index ETF XCV $0.373
    iShares Core MSCI Global Quality Dividend Index ETF XDG $0.061
    iShares Core MSCI Global Quality Dividend Index ETF(1) XDG.U $0.042
    iShares Core MSCI Global Quality Dividend Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XDGH $0.060
    iShares Core MSCI Canadian Quality Dividend Index ETF XDIV $0.115
    iShares Core MSCI US Quality Dividend Index ETF XDU $0.064
    iShares Core MSCI US Quality Dividend Index ETF(1) XDU.U $0.044
    iShares Core MSCI US Quality Dividend Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XDUH $0.059
    iShares Canadian Select Dividend Index ETF XDV $0.114
    iShares J.P. Morgan USD Emerging Markets Bond Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XEB $0.057
    iShares S&P/TSX Capped Energy Index ETF XEG $0.133
    iShares S&P/TSX Composite High Dividend Index ETF XEI $0.111
    iShares Jantzi Social Index ETF XEN $0.219
    iShares Core Equity ETF Portfolio XEQT $0.090
    iShares ESG Aware MSCI Canada Index ETF XESG $0.189
    iShares Core Canadian 15+ Year Federal Bond Index ETF XFLB $0.111
    iShares Flexible Monthly Income ETF XFLI $0.194
    iShares Flexible Monthly Income ETF(1) XFLI.U $0.135
    iShares Flexible Monthly Income ETF (CAD-Hedged) XFLX $0.180
    iShares S&P/TSX Capped Financials Index ETF XFN $0.140
    iShares Floating Rate Index ETF XFR $0.063
    iShares Core Canadian Government Bond Index ETF XGB $0.049
    iShares Global Government Bond Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XGGB $0.040
    iShares Core Growth ETF Portfolio XGRO $0.111
    iShares Canadian HYBrid Corporate Bond Index ETF XHB $0.073
    iShares U.S. High Dividend Equity Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XHD $0.083
    iShares U.S. High Dividend Equity Index ETF XHU $0.080
    iShares U.S. High Yield Bond Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XHY $0.084
    iShares Core S&P/TSX Capped Composite Index ETF XIC $0.273
    iShares U.S. IG Corporate Bond Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XIG $0.070
    iShares 1-5 Year U.S. IG Corporate Bond Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XIGS $0.122
    iShares Core Income Balanced ETF Portfolio XINC $0.133
    iShares Core Canadian Long Term Bond Index ETF XLB $0.062
    iShares S&P/TSX Capped Materials Index ETF XMA $0.043
    iShares S&P/TSX Completion Index ETF XMD $0.169
    iShares MSCI Min Vol USA Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XMS $0.102
    iShares MSCI USA Momentum Factor Index ETF XMTM $0.070
    iShares MSCI Min Vol USA Index ETF XMU $0.242
    iShares MSCI Min Vol USA Index ETF(1) XMU.U $0.168
    iShares MSCI Min Vol Canada Index ETF XMV $0.298
    iShares S&P/TSX North American Preferred Stock Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XPF $0.071
    iShares High Quality Canadian Bond Index ETF XQB $0.053
    iShares MSCI USA Quality Factor Index ETF XQLT $0.058
    iShares S&P/TSX Capped REIT Index ETF XRE $0.065
    iShares ESG Aware Canadian Aggregate Bond Index ETF XSAB $0.047
    iShares Core Canadian Short Term Bond Index ETF XSB $0.071
    iShares Conservative Short Term Strategic Fixed Income ETF XSC $0.057
    iShares Conservative Strategic Fixed Income ETF XSE $0.052
    iShares Core Canadian Short Term Corporate Bond Index ETF XSH $0.060
    iShares ESG Advanced 1-5 Year Canadian Corporate Bond Index ETF XSHG $0.119
    iShares 1-5 Year U.S. IG Corporate Bond Index ETF XSHU $0.127
    iShares 1-5 Year U.S. IG Corporate Bond Index ETF(1) XSHU.U $0.080
    iShares Short Term Strategic Fixed Income ETF XSI $0.061
    iShares S&P/TSX Capped Consumer Staples Index ETF XST $0.130
    iShares ESG Aware Canadian Short Term Bond Index ETF XSTB $0.047
    iShares 0-5 Year TIPS Bond Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XSTH $0.037
    iShares 0-5 Year TIPS Bond Index ETF XSTP $0.042
    iShares 0-5 Year TIPS Bond Index ETF(1) XSTP.U $0.029
    iShares ESG Aware MSCI USA Index ETF XSUS $0.088
    iShares 20+ Year U.S. Treasury Bond Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XTLH $0.117
    iShares 20+ Year U.S. Treasury Bond Index ETF XTLT $0.125
    iShares 20+ Year U.S. Treasury Bond Index ETF(1) XTLT.U $0.087
    iShares Diversified Monthly Income ETF XTR $0.040
    iShares Core S&P U.S. Total Market Index ETF (CAD-Hedged) XUH $0.108
    iShares S&P U.S. Financials Index ETF XUSF $0.160
    iShares ESG Advanced MSCI USA Index ETF XUSR $0.174
    iShares S&P/TSX Capped Utilities Index ETF XUT $0.090
    iShares Core S&P U.S. Total Market Index ETF XUU $0.142
    iShares Core S&P U.S. Total Market Index ETF(1) XUU.U $0.099
    iShares MSCI USA Value Factor Index ETF XVLU $0.148

    (1) Distribution per unit amounts are in U.S. dollars for XAGG.U, XCBU.U, XDG.U, XDU.U, XFLI.U, XMU.U, XSHU.U, XSTP.U, XTLT.U, XUU.U

    Estimated March Cash Distributions for the iShares Premium Money Market ETF

    The March cash distributions per unit for the iShares Premium Money Market ETF are estimated to be as follows:

    Fund Name Fund
    Ticker
    Estimated
    Cash Distribution
    Per Unit
    iShares Premium Money Market ETF CMR $0.121

    BlackRock Canada expects to issue a press release on or about March 25, 2025, which will provide the final amounts for the iShares Premium Money Market ETF.

    Further information on the iShares Funds can be found at http://www.blackrock.com/ca.

    About BlackRock

    BlackRock’s purpose is to help more and more people experience financial well-being. As a fiduciary to investors and a leading provider of financial technology, we help millions of people build savings that serve them throughout their lives by making investing easier and more affordable. For additional information on BlackRock, please visit www.blackrock.com/corporate | Twitter: @BlackRockCA

    About iShares ETFs

    iShares unlocks opportunity across markets to meet the evolving needs of investors. With more than twenty years of experience, a global line-up of 1500+ exchange traded funds (ETFs) and US$4.2 trillion in assets under management as of December 31, 2024, iShares continues to drive progress for the financial industry. iShares funds are powered by the expert portfolio and risk management of BlackRock.

    iShares® ETFs are managed by BlackRock Asset Management Canada Limited.

    Commissions, trailing commissions, management fees and expenses all may be associated with investing in iShares ETFs. Please read the relevant prospectus before investing. The funds are not guaranteed, their values change frequently and past performance may not be repeated. Tax, investment and all other decisions should be made, as appropriate, only with guidance from a qualified professional.

    Standard & Poor’s® and S&P® are registered trademarks of Standard & Poor’s Financial Services LLC (“S&P”). Dow Jones is a registered trademark of Dow Jones Trademark Holdings LLC (“Dow Jones”). TSX is a registered trademark of TSX Inc. (“TSX”). All of the foregoing trademarks have been licensed to S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC and sublicensed for certain purposes to BlackRock Fund Advisors (“BFA”),  which in turn has sub-licensed these marks to its affiliate, BlackRock Asset Management Canada Limited (“BlackRock Canada”), on behalf of the applicable fund(s). The index is a product of S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC, and has been licensed for use by BFA and by extension, BlackRock Canada and the applicable fund(s). The funds are not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC, Dow Jones, S&P, any of their respective affiliates (collectively known as “S&P Dow Jones Indices”) or TSX, or any of their respective affiliates. Neither S&P Dow Jones Indices nor TSX make any representations regarding the advisability of investing in such funds.

    MSCI is a trademark of MSCI, Inc. (“MSCI”). The ETF is permitted to use the MSCI mark pursuant to a license agreement between MSCI and BlackRock Institutional Trust Company, N.A., relating to, among other things, the license granted to BlackRock Institutional Trust Company, N.A. to use the Index. BlackRock Institutional Trust Company, N.A. has sublicensed the use of this trademark to BlackRock. The ETF is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by MSCI and MSCI makes no representation, condition or warranty regarding the advisability of investing in the ETF.

    Contact for Media:                
    Sydney Punchard                                                        
    Email: Sydney.Punchard@blackrock.com         
      

    The MIL Network